82cc72dd2b2a69f453eff0ec44d12386d8fce8eb
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset MMIX
442
443 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NIOSII
450
451 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
454 @end ifset
455 @ifset NDS32
456
457 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
465 [@b{-mb2bb}]
466 @end ifset
467 @ifset PDP11
468
469 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset PJ
475
476 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
478 @end ifset
479 @ifset PPC
480
481 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
495 @end ifset
496 @ifset RL78
497
498 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
499 [@b{-mg10}]
500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset RX
503
504 @emph{Target RX options:}
505 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
506 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
507 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
508 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
509 [@b{-mpid}]
510 [@b{-mrelax}]
511 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
512 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset S390
515
516 @emph{Target s390 options:}
517 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
518 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
519 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
520 @end ifset
521 @ifset SCORE
522
523 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
524 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
525 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
526 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
527 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
528 @end ifset
529 @ifset SPARC
530
531 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
532 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
533 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
534 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
535 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
536 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
537 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
538 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
539 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
540 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
541 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
542 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
543 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
544 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
545 @b{-bump}]
546 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
547 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
548 @end ifset
549 @ifset TIC54X
550
551 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
552 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
553 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
554 @end ifset
555 @ifset TIC6X
556
557 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
558 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
559 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
560 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
561 @end ifset
562 @ifset TILEGX
563
564 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
565 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
566 @end ifset
567 @ifset TILEPRO
568 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
569 @end ifset
570 @ifset VISIUM
571
572 @emph{Target Visium options:}
573 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
574 @end ifset
575 @ifset XTENSA
576
577 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
578 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
579 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
580 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
581 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
582 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
583 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
584 @end ifset
585 @ifset Z80
586
587 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
588 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
589 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
590 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
591 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
592 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
593 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
594 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
595 @end ifset
596 @ifset Z8000
597
598 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
599 @end ifset
600
601 @c man end
602 @end smallexample
603
604 @c man begin OPTIONS
605
606 @table @gcctabopt
607 @include at-file.texi
608
609 @item -a[cdghlmns]
610 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
611
612 @table @gcctabopt
613 @item -ac
614 omit false conditionals
615
616 @item -ad
617 omit debugging directives
618
619 @item -ag
620 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
621
622 @item -ah
623 include high-level source
624
625 @item -al
626 include assembly
627
628 @item -am
629 include macro expansions
630
631 @item -an
632 omit forms processing
633
634 @item -as
635 include symbols
636
637 @item =file
638 set the name of the listing file
639 @end table
640
641 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
642 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
643 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
644
645 @item --alternate
646 Begin in alternate macro mode.
647 @ifclear man
648 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
649 @end ifclear
650
651 @item --compress-debug-sections
652 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
653 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
654 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
655 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
656
657 @ifset ELF
658 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
659 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
660 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
661 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
662 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
663 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
664 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
665 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
666 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
667 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
668 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
669 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
670 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
671 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
672 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
673
674 @end ifset
675
676 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
677 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
678 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
679 override this.
680
681 @item -D
682 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
683 other assemblers.
684
685 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
686 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
687 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
688
689 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
690 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
691 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
692 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
693 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
694 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
695
696 @item -f
697 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
698 compiler output).
699
700 @item -g
701 @itemx --gen-debug
702 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
703 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
704 ECOFF or DWARF2.
705
706 @item --gstabs
707 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
708 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
709
710 @item --gstabs+
711 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
712 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
713 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
714 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
715 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
716
717 @item --gdwarf-2
718 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
719 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
720 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
721
722 @item --gdwarf-sections
723 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
724 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
725 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
726 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
727 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
728 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
729 suffix.
730
731 @ifset ELF
732 @item --size-check=error
733 @itemx --size-check=warning
734 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
735
736 @item --elf-stt-common=no
737 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
738 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
739 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
740 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
741 @end ifset
742
743 @item --help
744 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
745
746 @item --target-help
747 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
748
749 @item -I @var{dir}
750 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
751
752 @item -J
753 Don't warn about signed overflow.
754
755 @item -K
756 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
757 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
758 @end ifclear
759 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
760 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
761 @end ifset
762
763 @item -L
764 @itemx --keep-locals
765 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
766 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
767 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
768 @ifclear man
769 @xref{Symbol Names}.
770 @end ifclear
771
772 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
773 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
774 listing to @var{number}.
775
776 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
777 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
778 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
779
780 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
781 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
782 @var{number} bytes.
783
784 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
785 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
786 to @var{number} + 1.
787
788 @item --no-pad-sections
789 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
790 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
791 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
792
793 @item -o @var{objfile}
794 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
795
796 @item -R
797 Fold the data section into the text section.
798
799 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
800 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
801 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
802 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
803 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
804 requirements at the expense of speed.
805
806 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
807 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
808 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
809 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
810
811 @ifset ELF
812 @item --sectname-subst
813 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
814 @ifclear man
815 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
816 @end ifclear
817 @end ifset
818
819 @item --statistics
820 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
821 assembly.
822
823 @item --strip-local-absolute
824 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
825
826 @item -v
827 @itemx -version
828 Print the @command{as} version.
829
830 @item --version
831 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
832
833 @item -W
834 @itemx --no-warn
835 Suppress warning messages.
836
837 @item --fatal-warnings
838 Treat warnings as errors.
839
840 @item --warn
841 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
842
843 @item -w
844 Ignored.
845
846 @item -x
847 Ignored.
848
849 @item -Z
850 Generate an object file even after errors.
851
852 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
853 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
854
855 @end table
856 @c man end
857
858 @ifset AARCH64
859
860 @ifclear man
861 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
862 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
863 @end ifclear
864
865 @ifset man
866 @c man begin OPTIONS
867 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
868 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
869 @c man end
870 @c man begin INCLUDE
871 @include c-aarch64.texi
872 @c ended inside the included file
873 @end ifset
874
875 @end ifset
876
877 @ifset ALPHA
878
879 @ifclear man
880 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
881 for an Alpha processor.
882 @end ifclear
883
884 @ifset man
885 @c man begin OPTIONS
886 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
887 processor.
888 @c man end
889 @c man begin INCLUDE
890 @include c-alpha.texi
891 @c ended inside the included file
892 @end ifset
893
894 @end ifset
895
896 @c man begin OPTIONS
897 @ifset ARC
898 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
899 processor.
900
901 @table @gcctabopt
902 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
903 This option selects the core processor variant.
904 @item -EB | -EL
905 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
906 @item -mcode-density
907 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
908 @end table
909 @end ifset
910
911 @ifset ARM
912 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
913 processor family.
914
915 @table @gcctabopt
916 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
917 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
918 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
919 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
920 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
921 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
922 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
923 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
924 @item -mthumb
925 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
926 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
927 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
928 @item -EB | -EL
929 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
930 @item -mthumb-interwork
931 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
932 ARM code in mind.
933 @item -mccs
934 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
935 @item -k
936 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
937 @end table
938 @end ifset
939 @c man end
940
941 @ifset Blackfin
942
943 @ifclear man
944 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
945 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
946 @end ifclear
947
948 @ifset man
949 @c man begin OPTIONS
950 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
951 the Blackfin processor family.
952 @c man end
953 @c man begin INCLUDE
954 @include c-bfin.texi
955 @c ended inside the included file
956 @end ifset
957
958 @end ifset
959
960 @c man begin OPTIONS
961 @ifset CRIS
962 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
963 @end ifset
964
965 @ifset D10V
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
967 a D10V processor.
968 @table @gcctabopt
969 @cindex D10V optimization
970 @cindex optimization, D10V
971 @item -O
972 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
973 @end table
974 @end ifset
975
976 @ifset D30V
977 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
978 processor.
979 @table @gcctabopt
980 @cindex D30V optimization
981 @cindex optimization, D30V
982 @item -O
983 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
984
985 @cindex D30V nops
986 @item -n
987 Warn when nops are generated.
988
989 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
990 @item -N
991 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
992 @end table
993 @end ifset
994 @c man end
995
996 @ifset EPIPHANY
997 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
998 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
999
1000 @ifclear man
1001 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1002 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1003 @end ifclear
1004
1005 @ifset man
1006 @c man begin OPTIONS
1007 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1008 an Epiphany processor.
1009 @c man end
1010 @c man begin INCLUDE
1011 @include c-epiphany.texi
1012 @c ended inside the included file
1013 @end ifset
1014
1015 @end ifset
1016
1017 @ifset H8300
1018
1019 @ifclear man
1020 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1021 for an H8/300 processor.
1022 @end ifclear
1023
1024 @ifset man
1025 @c man begin OPTIONS
1026 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1027 processor.
1028 @c man end
1029 @c man begin INCLUDE
1030 @include c-h8300.texi
1031 @c ended inside the included file
1032 @end ifset
1033
1034 @end ifset
1035
1036 @ifset I80386
1037
1038 @ifclear man
1039 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1040 configured for an i386 processor.
1041 @end ifclear
1042
1043 @ifset man
1044 @c man begin OPTIONS
1045 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1046 an i386 processor.
1047 @c man end
1048 @c man begin INCLUDE
1049 @include c-i386.texi
1050 @c ended inside the included file
1051 @end ifset
1052
1053 @end ifset
1054
1055 @c man begin OPTIONS
1056 @ifset I960
1057 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1058 Intel 80960 processor.
1059
1060 @table @gcctabopt
1061 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1062 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1063
1064 @item -b
1065 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1066
1067 @item -no-relax
1068 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1069 error if necessary.
1070
1071 @end table
1072 @end ifset
1073
1074 @ifset IP2K
1075 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1076 Ubicom IP2K series.
1077
1078 @table @gcctabopt
1079
1080 @item -mip2022ext
1081 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1082
1083 @item -mip2022
1084 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1085 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1086
1087 @end table
1088 @end ifset
1089
1090 @ifset M32C
1091 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1092 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1093
1094 @table @gcctabopt
1095
1096 @item -m32c
1097 Assemble M32C instructions.
1098
1099 @item -m16c
1100 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1101
1102 @item -relax
1103 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1104
1105 @item -h-tick-hex
1106 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1107
1108 @end table
1109 @end ifset
1110
1111 @ifset M32R
1112 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1113 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1114
1115 @table @gcctabopt
1116
1117 @item --m32rx
1118 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1119 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1120
1121 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1122 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1123 encountered.
1124
1125 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1126 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1127 encountered.
1128
1129 @end table
1130 @end ifset
1131
1132 @ifset M680X0
1133 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1134 Motorola 68000 series.
1135
1136 @table @gcctabopt
1137
1138 @item -l
1139 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1140
1141 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1142 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1143 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1144 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1145 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1146
1147 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1148 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1149 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1150 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1151 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1152 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1153
1154 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1155 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1156 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1157
1158 @end table
1159 @end ifset
1160
1161 @ifset NIOSII
1162
1163 @ifclear man
1164 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1165 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1166 @end ifclear
1167
1168 @ifset man
1169 @c man begin OPTIONS
1170 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1171 Altera Nios II processor.
1172 @c man end
1173 @c man begin INCLUDE
1174 @include c-nios2.texi
1175 @c ended inside the included file
1176 @end ifset
1177 @end ifset
1178
1179 @ifset PDP11
1180
1181 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1182 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1183
1184 @table @gcctabopt
1185 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1186 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1187 default is @option{-mpic}.
1188
1189 @item -mall
1190 @itemx -mall-extensions
1191 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1192
1193 @item -mno-extensions
1194 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1195
1196 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1197 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1198
1199 @item -m@var{cpu}
1200 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1201 disable all other extensions.
1202
1203 @item -m@var{machine}
1204 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1205 model, and disable all other extensions.
1206 @end table
1207
1208 @end ifset
1209
1210 @ifset PJ
1211 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1212 a picoJava processor.
1213
1214 @table @gcctabopt
1215
1216 @cindex PJ endianness
1217 @cindex endianness, PJ
1218 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1219 @item -mb
1220 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1221
1222 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1223 @item -ml
1224 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1225
1226 @end table
1227 @end ifset
1228
1229 @ifset M68HC11
1230 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1231 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1232
1233 @table @gcctabopt
1234
1235 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1236 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1237 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1238
1239 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1240 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1241 XGATE address space.
1242
1243 @item -mshort
1244 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1245
1246 @item -mlong
1247 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1248
1249 @item -mshort-double
1250 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1251
1252 @item -mlong-double
1253 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1254
1255 @item --force-long-branches
1256 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1257 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1258 sub routine.
1259
1260 @item -S | --short-branches
1261 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1262 when the offset is out of range.
1263
1264 @item --strict-direct-mode
1265 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1266 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1267
1268 @item --print-insn-syntax
1269 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1270
1271 @item --print-opcodes
1272 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1273
1274 @item --generate-example
1275 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1276 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1277
1278 @end table
1279 @end ifset
1280
1281 @ifset SPARC
1282 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1283 for the SPARC architecture:
1284
1285 @table @gcctabopt
1286 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1287 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1288 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1289
1290 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1291 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1292
1293 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1294 UltraSPARC extensions.
1295
1296 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1297 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1298 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1299
1300 @item -bump
1301 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1302 @end table
1303 @end ifset
1304
1305 @ifset TIC54X
1306 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1307 architecture.
1308
1309 @table @gcctabopt
1310 @item -mfar-mode
1311 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1312 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1313 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1314 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1315 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1316 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1317 behaviour in the shell.
1318 @end table
1319 @end ifset
1320
1321 @ifset MIPS
1322 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1323 a MIPS processor.
1324
1325 @table @gcctabopt
1326 @item -G @var{num}
1327 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1328 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1329 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1330
1331 @cindex MIPS endianness
1332 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1333 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1334 @item -EB
1335 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1336
1337 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1338 @item -EL
1339 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1340
1341 @cindex MIPS ISA
1342 @item -mips1
1343 @itemx -mips2
1344 @itemx -mips3
1345 @itemx -mips4
1346 @itemx -mips5
1347 @itemx -mips32
1348 @itemx -mips32r2
1349 @itemx -mips32r3
1350 @itemx -mips32r5
1351 @itemx -mips32r6
1352 @itemx -mips64
1353 @itemx -mips64r2
1354 @itemx -mips64r3
1355 @itemx -mips64r5
1356 @itemx -mips64r6
1357 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1358 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1359 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1360 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1361 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1362 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1363 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1364 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1365 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1366 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1367
1368 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1369 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1370
1371 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1372 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1373
1374 @item -mfix7000
1375 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1376 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1377 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1378
1379 @item -mfix-rm7000
1380 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1381 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1382 followed by a load instruction.
1383
1384 @item -mdebug
1385 @itemx -no-mdebug
1386 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1387 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1388
1389 @item -mpdr
1390 @itemx -mno-pdr
1391 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1392
1393 @item -mgp32
1394 @itemx -mfp32
1395 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1396 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1397 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1398 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1399
1400 @item -mgp64
1401 @itemx -mfp64
1402 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1403 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1404 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1405 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1406
1407 @item -mfpxx
1408 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1409 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1410 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1411 32 or 64 bits wide.
1412
1413 @item -modd-spreg
1414 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1415 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1416 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1417 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1418
1419 @item -mips16
1420 @itemx -no-mips16
1421 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1422 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1423 turns off this option.
1424
1425 @item -mmicromips
1426 @itemx -mno-micromips
1427 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1428 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1429 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1430 at the start of the assembly file.
1431
1432 @item -msmartmips
1433 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1434 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1435 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1436 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1437
1438 @item -mips3d
1439 @itemx -no-mips3d
1440 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1441 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1442 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1443
1444 @item -mdmx
1445 @itemx -no-mdmx
1446 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1447 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1448 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1449
1450 @item -mdsp
1451 @itemx -mno-dsp
1452 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1453 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1454 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1455
1456 @item -mdspr2
1457 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1458 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1459 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1460 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1461 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1462
1463 @item -mdspr3
1464 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1465 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1466 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1467 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1468 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1469
1470 @item -mmsa
1471 @itemx -mno-msa
1472 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1473 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1474 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1475
1476 @item -mxpa
1477 @itemx -mno-xpa
1478 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1479 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1480 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1481
1482 @item -mmt
1483 @itemx -mno-mt
1484 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1485 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1486 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1487
1488 @item -mmcu
1489 @itemx -mno-mcu
1490 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1491 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1492 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1493
1494 @item -minsn32
1495 @itemx -mno-insn32
1496 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1497 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1498 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1499 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1500 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1501 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1502 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1503
1504 @item --construct-floats
1505 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1506 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1507 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1508 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1509 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1510 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1511
1512 @item --relax-branch
1513 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1514 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1515 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1516 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1517
1518 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1519 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1520 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1521
1522 @cindex emulation
1523 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1524 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1525 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1526 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1527 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1528
1529 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1530 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1531 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1532 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1533 preferred options instead.
1534
1535 @item -nocpp
1536 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1537 the native tools.
1538
1539 @item --trap
1540 @itemx --no-trap
1541 @itemx --break
1542 @itemx --no-break
1543 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1544 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1545 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1546 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1547 break exception.
1548
1549 @item -n
1550 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1551 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1552 @end table
1553 @end ifset
1554
1555 @ifset MCORE
1556 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1557 an MCore processor.
1558
1559 @table @gcctabopt
1560 @item -jsri2bsr
1561 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1562 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1563 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1564
1565 @item -sifilter
1566 @itemx -nosifilter
1567 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1568 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1569
1570 @item -relax
1571 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1572
1573 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1574 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1575 can be assembled.
1576
1577 @item -EB
1578 Assemble for a big endian target.
1579
1580 @item -EL
1581 Assemble for a little endian target.
1582
1583 @end table
1584 @end ifset
1585 @c man end
1586
1587 @ifset METAG
1588
1589 @ifclear man
1590 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1591 for a Meta processor.
1592 @end ifclear
1593
1594 @ifset man
1595 @c man begin OPTIONS
1596 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1597 Meta processor.
1598 @c man end
1599 @c man begin INCLUDE
1600 @include c-metag.texi
1601 @c ended inside the included file
1602 @end ifset
1603
1604 @end ifset
1605
1606 @c man begin OPTIONS
1607 @ifset MMIX
1608 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1609 @end ifset
1610
1611 @ifset NDS32
1612
1613 @ifclear man
1614 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1615 for a NDS32 processor.
1616 @end ifclear
1617 @c ended inside the included file
1618 @end ifset
1619
1620 @ifset man
1621 @c man begin OPTIONS
1622 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1623 NDS32 processor.
1624 @c man end
1625 @c man begin INCLUDE
1626 @include c-nds32.texi
1627 @c ended inside the included file
1628 @end ifset
1629
1630 @c man end
1631 @ifset PPC
1632
1633 @ifclear man
1634 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1635 for a PowerPC processor.
1636 @end ifclear
1637
1638 @ifset man
1639 @c man begin OPTIONS
1640 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1641 PowerPC processor.
1642 @c man end
1643 @c man begin INCLUDE
1644 @include c-ppc.texi
1645 @c ended inside the included file
1646 @end ifset
1647
1648 @end ifset
1649
1650 @c man begin OPTIONS
1651 @ifset RX
1652 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1653 @end ifset
1654
1655 @ifset S390
1656 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1657 processor family.
1658
1659 @table @gcctabopt
1660 @item -m31
1661 @itemx -m64
1662 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1663 @item -mesa
1664 @item -mzarch
1665 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1666 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1667 @item -march=@var{processor}
1668 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1669 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1670 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1671 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1672 or @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}).
1673 @item -mregnames
1674 @itemx -mno-regnames
1675 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1676 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1677 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1678 but evaluates to zero.
1679 @end table
1680 @end ifset
1681 @c man end
1682
1683 @ifset TIC6X
1684
1685 @ifclear man
1686 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1687 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1688 @end ifclear
1689
1690 @ifset man
1691 @c man begin OPTIONS
1692 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1693 TMS320C6000 processor.
1694 @c man end
1695 @c man begin INCLUDE
1696 @include c-tic6x.texi
1697 @c ended inside the included file
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @end ifset
1701
1702 @ifset TILEGX
1703
1704 @ifclear man
1705 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1706 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1707 @end ifclear
1708
1709 @ifset man
1710 @c man begin OPTIONS
1711 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1712 processor.
1713 @c man end
1714 @c man begin INCLUDE
1715 @include c-tilegx.texi
1716 @c ended inside the included file
1717 @end ifset
1718
1719 @end ifset
1720
1721 @ifset VISIUM
1722
1723 @ifclear man
1724 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1725 for a Visium processor.
1726 @end ifclear
1727
1728 @ifset man
1729 @c man begin OPTIONS
1730 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1731 processor.
1732 @c man end
1733 @c man begin INCLUDE
1734 @include c-visium.texi
1735 @c ended inside the included file
1736 @end ifset
1737
1738 @end ifset
1739
1740 @ifset XTENSA
1741
1742 @ifclear man
1743 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1744 for an Xtensa processor.
1745 @end ifclear
1746
1747 @ifset man
1748 @c man begin OPTIONS
1749 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1750 Xtensa processor.
1751 @c man end
1752 @c man begin INCLUDE
1753 @include c-xtensa.texi
1754 @c ended inside the included file
1755 @end ifset
1756
1757 @end ifset
1758
1759 @c man begin OPTIONS
1760
1761 @ifset Z80
1762 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1763 a Z80 family processor.
1764 @table @gcctabopt
1765 @item -z80
1766 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1767 @item -r800
1768 Assemble for R800 processor.
1769 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1770 @itemx -Wnud
1771 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1772 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1773 @itemx -Wnup
1774 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1775 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1776 @itemx -Wud
1777 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1778 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1779 @itemx -Wup
1780 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1781 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1782 @itemx -Fud
1783 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1784 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1785 @itemx -Fup
1786 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1787 @end table
1788 @end ifset
1789
1790 @c man end
1791
1792 @menu
1793 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1794 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1795 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1796 * Command Line:: Command Line
1797 * Input Files:: Input Files
1798 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1799 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1800 @end menu
1801
1802 @node Manual
1803 @section Structure of this Manual
1804
1805 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1806 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1807 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1808 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1809 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1810
1811 @ifclear GENERIC
1812 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1813 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1814 @end ifclear
1815 @ifset GENERIC
1816 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1817 various flavors of the assembler.
1818 @end ifset
1819
1820 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1821 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1822 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1823 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1824 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1825 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1826 particular architecture.
1827 @ifset GENERIC
1828 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1829 machine architecture manual for this information.
1830 @end ifset
1831 @ifclear GENERIC
1832 @ifset H8/300
1833 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1834 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1835 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1836 @end ifset
1837 @ifset SH
1838 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1839 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1840 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1841 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1842 @end ifset
1843 @ifset Z8000
1844 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1845 @end ifset
1846 @end ifclear
1847
1848 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1849 @ignore
1850 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1851 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1852 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1853 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1854 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1855 qualification.
1856
1857 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1858 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1859 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1860 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1861 @end ignore
1862
1863 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1864 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1865 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1866 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1867 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1868 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1869 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1870 @c directives).
1871
1872 @node GNU Assembler
1873 @section The GNU Assembler
1874
1875 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1876
1877 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1878 @ifclear GENERIC
1879 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1880 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1881 @end ifclear
1882 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1883 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1884 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1885 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1886 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1887
1888 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1889 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1890 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1891 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1892 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1893 machine would assemble.
1894 @ifset VAX
1895 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset M680X0
1898 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1899 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1900 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1901 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1902 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1903 @end ifset
1904
1905 @c man end
1906
1907 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1908 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1909 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1910
1911 @node Object Formats
1912 @section Object File Formats
1913
1914 @cindex object file format
1915 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1916 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1917 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1918 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1919 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1920 @ifclear GENERIC
1921 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1922 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1923 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1924 @end ifclear
1925 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1926 @ifset I960
1927 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1928 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1929 @end ifset
1930 @ifset HPPA
1931 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1932 SOM or ELF format object files.
1933 @end ifset
1934 @end ifclear
1935
1936 @node Command Line
1937 @section Command Line
1938
1939 @cindex command line conventions
1940
1941 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1942 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1943 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1944 significant.
1945
1946 @cindex standard input, as input file
1947 @kindex --
1948 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1949 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1950
1951 @cindex options, command line
1952 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1953 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1954 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1955 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1956 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1957
1958 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1959 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1960 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1961 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1962
1963 @smallexample
1964 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1965 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 @node Input Files
1969 @section Input Files
1970
1971 @cindex input
1972 @cindex source program
1973 @cindex files, input
1974 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1975 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1976 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1977 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1978
1979 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1980 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1981 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1982 order specified.
1983
1984 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1985 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1986 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1987 (The standard input is also a file.)
1988
1989 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1990 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1991 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1992 is taken to be an input file name.
1993
1994 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1995 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1996 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1997 to assemble.
1998
1999 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2000 in your command line.
2001
2002 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2003 file.
2004
2005 @c man end
2006
2007 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2008
2009 @cindex input file linenumbers
2010 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2011 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2012 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2013 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2014 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2015
2016 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2017 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2018
2019 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2020 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2021 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2022 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2023 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2024 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2025
2026 @node Object
2027 @section Output (Object) File
2028
2029 @cindex object file
2030 @cindex output file
2031 @kindex a.out
2032 @kindex .o
2033 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2034 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2035 is the object file. Its default name is
2036 @ifclear BOUT
2037 @code{a.out}.
2038 @end ifclear
2039 @ifset BOUT
2040 @ifset GENERIC
2041 @code{a.out}, or
2042 @end ifset
2043 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2044 @end ifset
2045 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2046 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2047 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2048 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2049 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2050
2051 @cindex linker
2052 @kindex ld
2053 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2054 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2055 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2056 information for the debugger.
2057
2058 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2059 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2060
2061 @node Errors
2062 @section Error and Warning Messages
2063
2064 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2065
2066 @cindex error messages
2067 @cindex warning messages
2068 @cindex messages from assembler
2069 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2070 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2071 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2072 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2073 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2074
2075 @c man end
2076
2077 @cindex format of warning messages
2078 Warning messages have the format
2079
2080 @smallexample
2081 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2082 @end smallexample
2083
2084 @noindent
2085 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2086 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2087 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2088 @ifset GENERIC
2089 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2090 @end ifset
2091 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2092 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2093 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2094
2095 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2096 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2097
2098 @smallexample
2099 .file 2 "bar.c"
2100 error_assembler_source
2101 .file "foo.c"
2102 .line 30
2103 error_c_source
2104 @end smallexample
2105
2106 produces this output:
2107
2108 @smallexample
2109 Assembler messages:
2110 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2111 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2112 @end smallexample
2113
2114 @cindex format of error messages
2115 Error messages have the format
2116
2117 @smallexample
2118 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2119 @end smallexample
2120
2121 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2122 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2123 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2124
2125 @node Invoking
2126 @chapter Command-Line Options
2127
2128 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2129 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2130 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2131 for options specific
2132 @ifclear GENERIC
2133 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2134 @end ifclear
2135 @ifset GENERIC
2136 to particular machine architectures.
2137 @end ifset
2138
2139 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2140
2141 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2142 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2143 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2144 by commas. For example:
2145
2146 @smallexample
2147 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2148 @end smallexample
2149
2150 @noindent
2151 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2152 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2153 local symbols in the symbol table).
2154
2155 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2156 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2157 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2158 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2159 assembler.)
2160
2161 @c man end
2162
2163 @menu
2164 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2165 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2166 * D:: -D for compatibility
2167 * f:: -f to work faster
2168 * I:: -I for .include search path
2169 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2170 * K:: -K for compatibility
2171 @end ifclear
2172 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2173 * K:: -K for difference tables
2174 @end ifset
2175
2176 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2177 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2178 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2179 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2180 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2181 * o:: -o to name the object file
2182 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2183 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2184 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2185 * v:: -v to announce version
2186 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2187 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2188 @end menu
2189
2190 @node a
2191 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2192
2193 @kindex -a
2194 @kindex -ac
2195 @kindex -ad
2196 @kindex -ag
2197 @kindex -ah
2198 @kindex -al
2199 @kindex -an
2200 @kindex -as
2201 @cindex listings, enabling
2202 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2203
2204 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2205 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2206 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2207 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2208 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2209 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2210 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2211 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2212 also.
2213
2214 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2215 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2216
2217 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2218 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2219 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2220 omitted from the listing.
2221
2222 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2223 listing.
2224
2225 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2226 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2227 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2228 @code{.sbttl}.
2229 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2230 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2231 listing-control directives have no effect.
2232
2233 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2234 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2235
2236 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2237 because it
2238 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2239 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2240 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2241 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2242 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2243
2244 @node alternate
2245 @section @option{--alternate}
2246
2247 @kindex --alternate
2248 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2249
2250 @node D
2251 @section @option{-D}
2252
2253 @kindex -D
2254 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2255 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2256 @command{@value{AS}}.
2257
2258 @node f
2259 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2260
2261 @kindex -f
2262 @cindex trusted compiler
2263 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2264 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2265 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2266 and comment preprocessing on
2267 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2268 ,Preprocessing}.
2269
2270 @quotation
2271 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2272 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2273 not work correctly.
2274 @end quotation
2275
2276 @node I
2277 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2278
2279 @kindex -I @var{path}
2280 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2281 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2282 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2283 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2284 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2285 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2286 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2287 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2288 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2289 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2290
2291 @node K
2292 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2293
2294 @kindex -K
2295 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2296 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2297 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2298 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2299 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2300 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2301 alteration on other platforms.
2302 @end ifclear
2303
2304 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2305 @cindex difference tables, warning
2306 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2307 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2308 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2309 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2310 is done.
2311 @end ifset
2312
2313 @node L
2314 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2315
2316 @kindex -L
2317 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2318 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2319 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2320 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2321 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2322 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2323 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2324 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2325
2326 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2327 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2328 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2329
2330 @node listing
2331 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2332
2333 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2334 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2335 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2336 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2337 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2338 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2339 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2340 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2341
2342 @table @gcctabopt
2343 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2344 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2345 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2346 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2347 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2348
2349 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2350 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2351 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2352 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2353 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2354 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2355 switch is used the default is to one.
2356
2357 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2358 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2359 @cindex Width of source line output
2360 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2361 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2362 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2363
2364 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2365 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2366 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2367 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2368 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2369 @end table
2370
2371 @node M
2372 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2373
2374 @kindex -M
2375 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2376 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2377 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2378 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2379 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2380 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2381 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2382 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2383 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2384
2385 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2386 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2387 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2388 individually. These are:
2389
2390 @itemize @bullet
2391 @item global symbols in common section
2392
2393 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2394 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2395 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2396 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2397 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2398
2399 @item complex relocations
2400
2401 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2402 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2403 are not support by other object file formats.
2404
2405 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2406
2407 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2408 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2409 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2410 script.
2411
2412 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2413
2414 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2415 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2416
2417 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2418
2419 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2420 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2421 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2422 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2423 assigned within a linker script.
2424 @end itemize
2425
2426 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2427 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2428 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2429
2430 @itemize @bullet
2431
2432 @item EBCDIC strings
2433
2434 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2435
2436 @item packed binary coded decimal
2437
2438 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2439 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2440
2441 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2442
2443 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2444
2445 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2446
2447 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2448
2449 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2450
2451 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2452 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2453 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2454 these options serve no purpose.
2455
2456 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2457
2458 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2459 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2460 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2461
2462 @item other @code{OPT} options
2463
2464 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2465 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2466
2467 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2468
2469 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2470 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2471
2472 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2473
2474 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2475
2476 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2477
2478 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2479
2480 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2481
2482 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2483
2484 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2485
2486 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2487
2488 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2489
2490 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2491
2492 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2493
2494 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2495
2496 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2497
2498 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2499
2500 @end itemize
2501
2502 @node MD
2503 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2504
2505 @kindex --MD
2506 @cindex dependency tracking
2507 @cindex make rules
2508
2509 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2510 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2511 dependencies of the main source file.
2512
2513 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2514
2515 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2516
2517 @node no-pad-sections
2518 @section Output Section Padding
2519 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2520 @cindex output section padding
2521 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2522 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2523 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2524 disable this behaviour.
2525
2526 @node o
2527 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2528
2529 @kindex -o
2530 @cindex naming object file
2531 @cindex object file name
2532 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2533 default it has the name
2534 @ifset GENERIC
2535 @ifset I960
2536 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2537 @end ifset
2538 @ifclear I960
2539 @file{a.out}.
2540 @end ifclear
2541 @end ifset
2542 @ifclear GENERIC
2543 @ifset I960
2544 @file{b.out}.
2545 @end ifset
2546 @ifclear I960
2547 @file{a.out}.
2548 @end ifclear
2549 @end ifclear
2550 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2551 object file a different name.
2552
2553 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2554 existing file of the same name.
2555
2556 @node R
2557 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2558
2559 @kindex -R
2560 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2561 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2562 @cindex joining text and data sections
2563 @cindex merging text and data sections
2564 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2565 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2566 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2567 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2568 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2569 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2570
2571 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2572 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2573 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2574 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2575
2576 @ifset COFF-ELF
2577 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2578 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2579 @samp{.data}.
2580 @end ifset
2581
2582 @ifset HPPA
2583 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2584 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2585 @end ifset
2586
2587 @node statistics
2588 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2589
2590 @kindex --statistics
2591 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2592 @cindex time, total for assembly
2593 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2594 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2595 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2596 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2597 seconds).
2598
2599 @node traditional-format
2600 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2601
2602 @kindex --traditional-format
2603 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2604 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2605 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2606
2607 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2608 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2609
2610 @node v
2611 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2612
2613 @kindex -v
2614 @kindex -version
2615 @cindex assembler version
2616 @cindex version of assembler
2617 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2618 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2619 command line.
2620
2621 @node W
2622 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2623
2624 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2625 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2626 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2627 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2628
2629 @kindex -W
2630 @kindex --no-warn
2631 @cindex suppressing warnings
2632 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2633 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2634 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2635 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2636 are still reported.
2637
2638 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2639 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2640 @cindex warnings, causing error
2641 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2642 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2643
2644 @kindex --warn
2645 @cindex warnings, switching on
2646 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2647 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2648
2649 @node Z
2650 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2651 @cindex object file, after errors
2652 @cindex errors, continuing after
2653 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2654 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2655 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2656 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2657 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2658 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2659
2660 @node Syntax
2661 @chapter Syntax
2662
2663 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2664 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2665 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2666 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2667 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2668 @ifclear VAX
2669 assembler.
2670 @end ifclear
2671 @ifset VAX
2672 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2673 @end ifset
2674
2675 @menu
2676 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2677 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2678 * Comments:: Comments
2679 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2680 * Statements:: Statements
2681 * Constants:: Constants
2682 @end menu
2683
2684 @node Preprocessing
2685 @section Preprocessing
2686
2687 @cindex preprocessing
2688 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2689 @itemize @bullet
2690 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2691 @item
2692 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2693 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2694 a single space.
2695
2696 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2697 @item
2698 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2699 appropriate number of newlines.
2700
2701 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2702 @item
2703 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2704 @end itemize
2705
2706 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2707 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2708 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2709 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2710 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2711 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2712 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2713
2714 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2715 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2716 preprocessed.
2717
2718 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2719 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2720 @kindex #NO_APP
2721 @kindex #APP
2722 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2723 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2724 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2725 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2726 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2727 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2728 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2729 and whitespace.
2730
2731 @node Whitespace
2732 @section Whitespace
2733
2734 @cindex whitespace
2735 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2736 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2737 people to read. Unless within character constants
2738 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2739 as exactly one space.
2740
2741 @node Comments
2742 @section Comments
2743
2744 @cindex comments
2745 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2746 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2747
2748 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2749 This means you may not nest these comments.
2750
2751 @smallexample
2752 /*
2753 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2754 is to use this sort of comment.
2755 */
2756
2757 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2758 @end smallexample
2759
2760 @cindex line comment character
2761 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2762 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2763 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2764 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2765 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2766 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2767 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2768 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2769
2770 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2771 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2772 to specify logical line numbers:
2773
2774 @kindex #
2775 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2776 @cindex logical line numbers
2777 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2778 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2779 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2780 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2781 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2782
2783 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2784 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2785
2786 @smallexample
2787 # This is an ordinary comment.
2788 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2789 # This is logical line # 36.
2790 @end smallexample
2791 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2792 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2793
2794 @node Symbol Intro
2795 @section Symbols
2796
2797 @cindex characters used in symbols
2798 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2799 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2800 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2801 @samp{_.$}.
2802 @end ifclear
2803 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2804 @ifclear GENERIC
2805 @ifset H8
2806 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2807 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2808 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2809 symbol names.)
2810 @end ifset
2811 @end ifclear
2812 @end ifset
2813 @ifset GENERIC
2814 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2815 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2816 @end ifset
2817 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2818 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2819 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2820 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2821 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2822
2823 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2824 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2825 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2826 backslash @code{\} character.
2827 @cindex length of symbols
2828
2829 @node Statements
2830 @section Statements
2831
2832 @cindex statements, structure of
2833 @cindex line separator character
2834 @cindex statement separator character
2835
2836 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2837 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2838 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2839 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2840 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2841 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2842 exception: they do not end statements.
2843
2844 @cindex newline, required at file end
2845 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2846 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2847 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2848
2849 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2850
2851 @cindex instructions and directives
2852 @cindex directives and instructions
2853 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2854 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2855 @c 13feb91.
2856 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2857 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2858 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2859 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2860 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2861 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2862 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2863 @ifset GENERIC
2864 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2865 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2866 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2867 language.@refill
2868 @end ifset
2869
2870 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2871 @cindex label (@code{:})
2872 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2873 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2874 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2875
2876 @ifset HPPA
2877 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2878 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2879 only one label may be defined on each line.
2880 @end ifset
2881
2882 @smallexample
2883 label: .directive followed by something
2884 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2885 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2886 @end smallexample
2887
2888 @node Constants
2889 @section Constants
2890
2891 @cindex constants
2892 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2893 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2894 @smallexample
2895 @group
2896 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2897 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2898 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2899 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2900 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2901 @end group
2902 @end smallexample
2903
2904 @menu
2905 * Characters:: Character Constants
2906 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2907 @end menu
2908
2909 @node Characters
2910 @subsection Character Constants
2911
2912 @cindex character constants
2913 @cindex constants, character
2914 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2915 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2916 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2917 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2918 used in arithmetic expressions.
2919
2920 @menu
2921 * Strings:: Strings
2922 * Chars:: Characters
2923 @end menu
2924
2925 @node Strings
2926 @subsubsection Strings
2927
2928 @cindex string constants
2929 @cindex constants, string
2930 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2931 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2932 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2933 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2934 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2935 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2936 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2937 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2938
2939 @cindex escape codes, character
2940 @cindex character escape codes
2941 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2942 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2943 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2944 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2945 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2946 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2947 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2948 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2949 @table @kbd
2950 @c @item \a
2951 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2952 @c
2953 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2954 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2955 @item \b
2956 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2957
2958 @c @item \e
2959 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2960 @c
2961 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2962 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2963 @item backslash-f
2964 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2965
2966 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2967 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2968 @item \n
2969 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2970
2971 @c @item \p
2972 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2973 @c
2974 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2975 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2976 @item \r
2977 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2978
2979 @c @item \s
2980 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2981 @c other assemblers.
2982 @c
2983 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
2984 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2985 @item \t
2986 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2987
2988 @c @item \v
2989 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2990 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2991 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2992 @c
2993 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2994 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2995 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2996 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2997 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2998 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2999
3000 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3001 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3002 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3003 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3004 lower case @code{x} works.
3005
3006 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3007 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3008 @item \\
3009 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3010
3011 @c @item \'
3012 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3013 @c This is needed in single character literals
3014 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3015 @c a @samp{'}.
3016 @c
3017 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3018 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3019 @item \"
3020 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3021 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3022
3023 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3024 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3025 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3026 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3027 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3028 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3029 code and warns you of the fact.
3030 @end table
3031
3032 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3033 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3034 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3035 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3036 sequence.
3037
3038 @node Chars
3039 @subsubsection Characters
3040
3041 @cindex single character constant
3042 @cindex character, single
3043 @cindex constant, single character
3044 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
3045 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
3046 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
3047 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
3048 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
3049 grave accent. A newline
3050 @ifclear GENERIC
3051 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3052 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3053 @end ifclear
3054 @ifset abnormal-separator
3055 @ifset H8
3056 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3057 Renesas SH)
3058 @end ifset
3059 @end ifset
3060 @end ifclear
3061 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3062 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3063 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3064 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3065 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3066
3067 @node Numbers
3068 @subsection Number Constants
3069
3070 @cindex constants, number
3071 @cindex number constants
3072 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3073 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3074 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3075 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3076 are floating point numbers, described below.
3077
3078 @menu
3079 * Integers:: Integers
3080 * Bignums:: Bignums
3081 * Flonums:: Flonums
3082 @ifclear GENERIC
3083 @ifset I960
3084 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3085 @end ifset
3086 @end ifclear
3087 @end menu
3088
3089 @node Integers
3090 @subsubsection Integers
3091 @cindex integers
3092 @cindex constants, integer
3093
3094 @cindex binary integers
3095 @cindex integers, binary
3096 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3097 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3098
3099 @cindex octal integers
3100 @cindex integers, octal
3101 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3102 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3103
3104 @cindex decimal integers
3105 @cindex integers, decimal
3106 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3107 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3108
3109 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3110 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3111 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3112 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3113
3114 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3115 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3116 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3117
3118 @node Bignums
3119 @subsubsection Bignums
3120
3121 @cindex bignums
3122 @cindex constants, bignum
3123 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3124 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3125 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3126 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3127
3128 @node Flonums
3129 @subsubsection Flonums
3130 @cindex flonums
3131 @cindex floating point numbers
3132 @cindex constants, floating point
3133
3134 @cindex precision, floating point
3135 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3136 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3137 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3138 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3139 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3140 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3141
3142 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3143 @itemize @bullet
3144 @item
3145 The digit @samp{0}.
3146 @ifset HPPA
3147 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3148 @end ifset
3149
3150 @item
3151 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3152 @ifset GENERIC
3153 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3154 @ignore
3155 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3156 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3157 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3158 @end ignore
3159
3160 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3161 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3162 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3163
3164 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3165 (in upper or lower case).
3166
3167 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3168 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3169
3170 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3171 @end ifset
3172 @ifclear GENERIC
3173 @ifset ARC
3174 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3175 @end ifset
3176 @ifset H8
3177 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3178 @end ifset
3179 @ifset HPPA
3180 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3181 @end ifset
3182 @ifset I960
3183 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3184 @end ifset
3185 @end ifclear
3186
3187 @item
3188 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3189
3190 @item
3191 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3192
3193 @item
3194 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3195 or more decimal digits.
3196
3197 @item
3198 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3199
3200 @itemize @bullet
3201 @item
3202 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3203 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3204 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3205 @item
3206 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3207 @item
3208 One or more decimal digits.
3209 @end itemize
3210
3211 @end itemize
3212
3213 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3214 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3215
3216 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3217 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3218 @command{@value{AS}}.
3219
3220 @ifclear GENERIC
3221 @ifset I960
3222 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3223 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3224 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3225 @node Bit Fields
3226 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3227
3228 @cindex bit fields
3229 @cindex constants, bit field
3230 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3231 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3232 @example
3233 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3234 @end example
3235 @noindent
3236 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3237 @var{value}.
3238
3239 The resulting number is then packed
3240 @ifset GENERIC
3241 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3242 (in host-dependent byte order)
3243 @end ifset
3244 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3245 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3246 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3247 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3248 least significant digits.@refill
3249
3250 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3251 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3252 @end ifset
3253 @end ifclear
3254
3255 @node Sections
3256 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3257 @cindex sections
3258 @cindex relocation
3259
3260 @menu
3261 * Secs Background:: Background
3262 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3263 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3264 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3265 * bss:: bss Section
3266 @end menu
3267
3268 @node Secs Background
3269 @section Background
3270
3271 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3272 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3273 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3274
3275 @cindex linker, and assembler
3276 @cindex assembler, and linker
3277 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3278 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3279 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3280 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3281 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3282 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3283 sections.
3284
3285 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3286 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3287 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3288 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3289 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3290 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3291 the proper run-time addresses.
3292 @ifset H8
3293 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3294 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3295 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3296 @end ifset
3297
3298 @cindex standard assembler sections
3299 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3300 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3301 @dfn{bss} sections.
3302
3303 @ifset COFF-ELF
3304 @ifset GENERIC
3305 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3306 @end ifset
3307 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3308 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3309 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3310 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3311 @end ifset
3312
3313 @ifset HPPA
3314 @ifset GENERIC
3315 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3316 @end ifset
3317 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3318 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3319 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3320 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3321 assembler directives.
3322
3323 @ifset SOM
3324 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3325 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3326 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3327 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3328 @end ifset
3329 @end ifset
3330
3331 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3332 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3333
3334 @ifset HPPA
3335 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3336 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3337 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3338 @end ifset
3339
3340 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3341 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3342 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3343 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3344 file is mentioned:
3345 @itemize @bullet
3346 @item
3347 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3348 an address?
3349 @item
3350 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3351 @item
3352 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3353 @display
3354 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3355 @end display
3356 @item
3357 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3358 @end itemize
3359
3360 @cindex addresses, format of
3361 @cindex section-relative addressing
3362 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3363 @display
3364 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3365 @end display
3366 @noindent
3367 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3368 nature.
3369 @ifset SOM
3370 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3371 symbol-relative instead.)
3372 @end ifset
3373
3374 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3375 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3376
3377 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3378 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3379 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3380 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3381 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3382 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3383 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3384 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3385 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3386
3387 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3388 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3389 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3390 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3391 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3392 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3393 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3394
3395 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3396 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3397 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3398 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3399 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3400 data and bss sections.
3401
3402 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3403 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3404
3405 @node Ld Sections
3406 @section Linker Sections
3407 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3408
3409 @table @strong
3410
3411 @ifset COFF-ELF
3412 @cindex named sections
3413 @cindex sections, named
3414 @item named sections
3415 @end ifset
3416 @ifset aout-bout
3417 @cindex text section
3418 @cindex data section
3419 @itemx text section
3420 @itemx data section
3421 @end ifset
3422 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3423 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3424 true of another.
3425 @c @ifset aout-bout
3426 When the program is running, however, it is
3427 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3428 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3429 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3430 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3431 in the data section.
3432 @c @end ifset
3433
3434 @cindex bss section
3435 @item bss section
3436 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3437 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3438 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3439 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3440 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3441 those explicit zeros from object files.
3442
3443 @cindex absolute section
3444 @item absolute section
3445 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3446 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3447 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3448 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3449
3450 @cindex undefined section
3451 @item undefined section
3452 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3453 the preceding sections.
3454 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3455 @end table
3456
3457 @cindex relocation example
3458 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3459 @ifset COFF-ELF
3460 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3461 @end ifset
3462 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3463
3464 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3465 @ifnottex
3466 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3467 @smallexample
3468 +-----+----+--+
3469 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3470 +-----+----+--+
3471
3472 text data bss
3473 seg. seg. seg.
3474
3475 +---+---+---+
3476 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3477 +---+---+---+
3478
3479 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3480 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3481 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3482
3483 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3484 @end smallexample
3485 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3486 @end ifnottex
3487 @need 5000
3488 @tex
3489 \bigskip
3490 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3491 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3492 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3493
3494 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3495 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3496 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3497
3498 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3499 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3500 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3501 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3502 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3503
3504 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3505 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3506
3507 @end tex
3508 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3509
3510 @node As Sections
3511 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3512
3513 @cindex internal assembler sections
3514 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3515 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3516 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3517 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3518 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3519 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3520 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3521 section-relative address.
3522
3523 @table @b
3524 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3525 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3526 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3527 bug in the assembler.
3528
3529 @cindex expr (internal section)
3530 @item expr section
3531 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3532 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3533 it in the expr section.
3534 @c FIXME item debug
3535 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3536 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3537 @c FIXME item register
3538 @end table
3539
3540 @node Sub-Sections
3541 @section Sub-Sections
3542
3543 @cindex numbered subsections
3544 @cindex grouping data
3545 @ifset aout-bout
3546 Assembled bytes
3547 @ifset COFF-ELF
3548 conventionally
3549 @end ifset
3550 fall into two sections: text and data.
3551 @end ifset
3552 You may have separate groups of
3553 @ifset GENERIC
3554 data in named sections
3555 @end ifset
3556 @ifclear GENERIC
3557 @ifclear aout-bout
3558 data in named sections
3559 @end ifclear
3560 @ifset aout-bout
3561 text or data
3562 @end ifset
3563 @end ifclear
3564 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3565 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3566 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3567 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3568 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3569 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3570 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3571 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3572 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3573 constants being output.
3574
3575 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3576 goes in subsection number zero.
3577
3578 @ifset GENERIC
3579 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3580 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3581 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3582 @end ifset
3583 @ifclear GENERIC
3584 @ifset H8
3585 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3586 boundary (two bytes).
3587 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3588 @end ifset
3589 @ifset I960
3590 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3591 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3592 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3593 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3594 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3595 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3596 @end ifset
3597 @end ifclear
3598
3599 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3600 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3601 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3602 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3603 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3604 data subsections as a data section.
3605
3606 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3607 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3608 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3609 @ifset COFF
3610 @ifset GENERIC
3611 When generating COFF output, you
3612 @end ifset
3613 @ifclear GENERIC
3614 You
3615 @end ifclear
3616 can also use an extra subsection
3617 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3618 @var{expression}}.
3619 @end ifset
3620 @ifset ELF
3621 @ifset GENERIC
3622 When generating ELF output, you
3623 @end ifset
3624 @ifclear GENERIC
3625 You
3626 @end ifclear
3627 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3628 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3629 @end ifset
3630 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3631 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3632 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3633 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3634 @smallexample
3635 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3636 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3637 .text 1
3638 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3639 .data 0
3640 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3641 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3642 .text 0
3643 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3644 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3645 @end smallexample
3646
3647 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3648 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3649 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3650 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3651 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3652 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3653 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3654
3655 @node bss
3656 @section bss Section
3657
3658 @cindex bss section
3659 @cindex common variable storage
3660 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3661 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3662 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3663 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3664 section are zeroed bytes.
3665
3666 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3667 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3668
3669 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3670 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3671
3672 @ifset GENERIC
3673 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3674 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3675 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3676 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3677 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3678 @end ifset
3679
3680 @node Symbols
3681 @chapter Symbols
3682
3683 @cindex symbols
3684 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3685 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3686 to debug.
3687
3688 @quotation
3689 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3690 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3691 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3692 @end quotation
3693
3694 @menu
3695 * Labels:: Labels
3696 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3697 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3698 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3699 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3700 @end menu
3701
3702 @node Labels
3703 @section Labels
3704
3705 @cindex labels
3706 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3707 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3708 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3709 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3710 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3711 definitions.
3712
3713 @ifset HPPA
3714 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3715 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3716 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3717 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3718 @end ifset
3719
3720 @node Setting Symbols
3721 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3722
3723 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3724 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3725 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3726 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3727 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3728 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3729 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3730 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3731
3732 @ifset Blackfin
3733 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3734 @end ifset
3735
3736 @node Symbol Names
3737 @section Symbol Names
3738
3739 @cindex symbol names
3740 @cindex names, symbol
3741 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3742 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3743 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3744 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3745 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3746 particular target machine), and underscores.
3747 @end ifclear
3748 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3749 @ifset H8
3750 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3751 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3752 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3753 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3754 @end ifset
3755 @end ifset
3756
3757 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3758 than @code{Foo}.
3759
3760 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3761 Local Labels. See below.
3762
3763 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3764 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3765 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3766 currently supported.
3767
3768 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3769 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3770 in a program.
3771
3772 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3773
3774 @cindex local symbol names
3775 @cindex symbol names, local
3776 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3777 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3778 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3779 set of local label prefixes.
3780 @ifset HPPA
3781 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3782 @end ifset
3783
3784 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3785 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3786 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3787 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3788
3789 @subheading Local Labels
3790
3791 @cindex local labels
3792 @cindex temporary symbol names
3793 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3794 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3795 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3796 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3797 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3798 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3799 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3800 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3801 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3802 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3803
3804 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3805 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3806 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3807 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3808 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3809 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3810 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3811
3812 Here is an example:
3813
3814 @smallexample
3815 1: branch 1f
3816 2: branch 1b
3817 1: branch 2f
3818 2: branch 1b
3819 @end smallexample
3820
3821 Which is the equivalent of:
3822
3823 @smallexample
3824 label_1: branch label_3
3825 label_2: branch label_1
3826 label_3: branch label_4
3827 label_4: branch label_3
3828 @end smallexample
3829
3830 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3831 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3832 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3833 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3834 these parts:
3835
3836 @table @code
3837 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3838 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3839 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3840 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3841 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3842 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3843 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3844 you may use them in debugging.
3845
3846 @item @var{number}
3847 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3848 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3849
3850 @item @kbd{C-B}
3851 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3852 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3853
3854 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3855 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3856 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3857 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3858 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3859 @end table
3860
3861 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3862 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3863
3864 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3865 @cindex dollar local symbols
3866
3867 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3868 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3869 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3870 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3871 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3872 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3873
3874 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3875 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3876 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3877
3878 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3879 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3880 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3881 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3882
3883 @node Dot
3884 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3885
3886 @cindex dot (symbol)
3887 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3888 @cindex current address
3889 @cindex location counter
3890 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3891 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3892 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3893 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3894 directive.
3895 @ifclear no-space-dir
3896 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3897 @samp{.space 4}.
3898 @end ifclear
3899
3900 @node Symbol Attributes
3901 @section Symbol Attributes
3902
3903 @cindex symbol attributes
3904 @cindex attributes, symbol
3905 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3906 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3907 attributes.
3908 @ifset INTERNALS
3909 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3910 @end ifset
3911
3912 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3913 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3914 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3915 would want.
3916
3917 @menu
3918 * Symbol Value:: Value
3919 * Symbol Type:: Type
3920 @ifset aout-bout
3921 @ifset GENERIC
3922 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3923 @end ifset
3924 @ifclear GENERIC
3925 @ifclear BOUT
3926 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3927 @end ifclear
3928 @ifset BOUT
3929 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3930 @end ifset
3931 @end ifclear
3932 @end ifset
3933 @ifset COFF
3934 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3935 @end ifset
3936 @ifset SOM
3937 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3938 @end ifset
3939 @end menu
3940
3941 @node Symbol Value
3942 @subsection Value
3943
3944 @cindex value of a symbol
3945 @cindex symbol value
3946 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3947 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3948 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3949 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3950 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3951 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3952 called absolute.
3953
3954 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3955 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3956 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3957 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3958 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3959 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3960 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3961 allocated storage.
3962
3963 @node Symbol Type
3964 @subsection Type
3965
3966 @cindex type of a symbol
3967 @cindex symbol type
3968 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3969 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3970 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3971 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3972
3973 @ifset aout-bout
3974 @ifclear GENERIC
3975 @ifset BOUT
3976 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3977 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3978 @need 1000
3979 @node a.out Symbols
3980 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3981
3982 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3983 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3984 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3985 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3986 @code{b.out}.
3987
3988 @end ifset
3989 @ifclear BOUT
3990 @node a.out Symbols
3991 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3992
3993 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3994 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3995
3996 @end ifclear
3997 @end ifclear
3998 @ifset GENERIC
3999 @node a.out Symbols
4000 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4001
4002 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4003 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4004
4005 @end ifset
4006 @menu
4007 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4008 * Symbol Other:: Other
4009 @end menu
4010
4011 @node Symbol Desc
4012 @subsubsection Descriptor
4013
4014 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4015 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4016 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4017 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4018 @command{@value{AS}}.
4019
4020 @node Symbol Other
4021 @subsubsection Other
4022
4023 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4024 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4025 @end ifset
4026
4027 @ifset COFF
4028 @node COFF Symbols
4029 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4030
4031 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4032 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4033
4034 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4035 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4036 @code{.endef} directives.
4037
4038 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4039
4040 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4041 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4042 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4043
4044 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4045
4046 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4047 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4048 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4049 table information for COFF.
4050 @end ifset
4051
4052 @ifset SOM
4053 @node SOM Symbols
4054 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4055
4056 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4057 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4058
4059 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4060 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4061
4062 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4063 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4064 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4065 @end ifset
4066
4067 @node Expressions
4068 @chapter Expressions
4069
4070 @cindex expressions
4071 @cindex addresses
4072 @cindex numeric values
4073 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4074 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4075
4076 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4077 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4078 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4079 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4080 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4081 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4082
4083 @menu
4084 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4085 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4086 @end menu
4087
4088 @node Empty Exprs
4089 @section Empty Expressions
4090
4091 @cindex empty expressions
4092 @cindex expressions, empty
4093 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4094 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4095 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4096 is compatible with other assemblers.
4097
4098 @node Integer Exprs
4099 @section Integer Expressions
4100
4101 @cindex integer expressions
4102 @cindex expressions, integer
4103 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4104 by @emph{operators}.
4105
4106 @menu
4107 * Arguments:: Arguments
4108 * Operators:: Operators
4109 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4110 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4111 @end menu
4112
4113 @node Arguments
4114 @subsection Arguments
4115
4116 @cindex expression arguments
4117 @cindex arguments in expressions
4118 @cindex operands in expressions
4119 @cindex arithmetic operands
4120 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4121 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4122 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4123 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4124 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4125 instruction operands.
4126
4127 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4128 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4129 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4130 integer.
4131
4132 Numbers are usually integers.
4133
4134 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4135 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4136 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4137 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4138 assemblers.
4139
4140 @cindex subexpressions
4141 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4142 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4143 operator followed by an argument.
4144
4145 @node Operators
4146 @subsection Operators
4147
4148 @cindex operators, in expressions
4149 @cindex arithmetic functions
4150 @cindex functions, in expressions
4151 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4152 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4153 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4154 whitespace.
4155
4156 @node Prefix Ops
4157 @subsection Prefix Operator
4158
4159 @cindex prefix operators
4160 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4161 one argument, which must be absolute.
4162
4163 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4164 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4165 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4166 @tex
4167 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4168 @end tex
4169
4170 @table @code
4171 @item -
4172 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4173 @item ~
4174 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4175 @end table
4176
4177 @tex
4178 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4179 @end tex
4180
4181 @node Infix Ops
4182 @subsection Infix Operators
4183
4184 @cindex infix operators
4185 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4186 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4187 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4188 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4189 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4190
4191 @enumerate
4192 @cindex operator precedence
4193 @cindex precedence of operators
4194
4195 @item
4196 Highest Precedence
4197
4198 @table @code
4199 @item *
4200 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4201
4202 @item /
4203 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4204
4205 @item %
4206 @dfn{Remainder}.
4207
4208 @item <<
4209 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4210
4211 @item >>
4212 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4213 @end table
4214
4215 @item
4216 Intermediate precedence
4217
4218 @table @code
4219 @item |
4220
4221 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4222
4223 @item &
4224 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4225
4226 @item ^
4227 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4228
4229 @item !
4230 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4231 @end table
4232
4233 @item
4234 Low Precedence
4235
4236 @table @code
4237 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4238 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4239 @cindex arguments for addition
4240 @item +
4241 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4242 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4243 sections.
4244
4245 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4246 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4247 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4248 @item -
4249 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4250 result has the section of the left argument.
4251 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4252 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4253 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4254
4255 @cindex comparison expressions
4256 @cindex expressions, comparison
4257 @item ==
4258 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4259 @item <>
4260 @itemx !=
4261 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4262 @item <
4263 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4264 @item >
4265 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4266 @item >=
4267 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4268 @item <=
4269 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4270
4271 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4272 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4273 perform signed comparisons.
4274 @end table
4275
4276 @item Lowest Precedence
4277
4278 @table @code
4279 @item &&
4280 @dfn{Logical And}.
4281
4282 @item ||
4283 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4284
4285 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4286 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4287 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4288 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4289
4290 @end table
4291 @end enumerate
4292
4293 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4294 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4295
4296 @node Pseudo Ops
4297 @chapter Assembler Directives
4298
4299 @cindex directives, machine independent
4300 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4301 @cindex machine independent directives
4302 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4303 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4304 in lower case.
4305
4306 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4307 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4308 @ifset GENERIC
4309 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4310 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4311 @end ifset
4312 @ifclear GENERIC
4313 @ifset machine-directives
4314 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4315 @end ifset
4316 @end ifclear
4317
4318 @menu
4319 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4320 @ifset COFF
4321 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4322 @end ifset
4323
4324 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4325 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4326 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4327 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4328 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4329 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4330 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4331 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4332 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4333 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4334 @ifset COFF
4335 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4336 @end ifset
4337 @ifset aout-bout
4338 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4339 @end ifset
4340 @ifset COFF
4341 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4342 @end ifset
4343
4344 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4345 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4346 * Else:: @code{.else}
4347 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4348 * End:: @code{.end}
4349 @ifset COFF
4350 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4351 @end ifset
4352
4353 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4354 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4355 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4356 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4357 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4358 * Err:: @code{.err}
4359 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4360 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4361 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4362 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4363 * File:: @code{.file}
4364 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4365 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4366 * Func:: @code{.func}
4367 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4368 @ifset ELF
4369 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4370 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4371 @end ifset
4372
4373 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4374 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4375 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4376 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4377 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4378 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4379 @ifset ELF
4380 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4381 @end ifset
4382
4383 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4384 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4385 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4386 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4387 @ifclear no-line-dir
4388 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4389 @end ifclear
4390
4391 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4392 * List:: @code{.list}
4393 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4394 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4395 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4396 @ifset ELF
4397 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4398 @end ifset
4399
4400 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4401 @ignore
4402 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4403 @end ignore
4404
4405 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4406 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4407 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4408 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4409 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4410 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4411 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4412 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4413 @ifset ELF
4414 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4415 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4416 @end ifset
4417
4418 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4419 @ifset ELF
4420 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4421 @end ifset
4422
4423 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4424 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4425 @ifset ELF
4426 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4427 @end ifset
4428
4429 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4430 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4431 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4432 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4433 @ifset COFF
4434 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4435 @end ifset
4436 @ifset COFF-ELF
4437 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4438 @end ifset
4439
4440 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4441 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4442 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4443 @ifset COFF-ELF
4444 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4445 @end ifset
4446 @ifclear no-space-dir
4447 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4448 @end ifclear
4449
4450 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4451 @ifclear no-space-dir
4452 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4453 @end ifclear
4454 @ifset have-stabs
4455 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4456 @end ifset
4457
4458 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4459 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4460 @ifset ELF
4461 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4462 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4463 @end ifset
4464
4465 @ifset COFF
4466 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4467 @end ifset
4468
4469 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4470 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4471 @ifset COFF-ELF
4472 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4473 @end ifset
4474
4475 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4476 @ifset COFF
4477 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4478 @end ifset
4479
4480 @ifset ELF
4481 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4482 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4483 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4484 @end ifset
4485
4486 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4487 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4488 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4489 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4490 @ifclear no-space-dir
4491 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4492 @end ifclear
4493 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4494 @end menu
4495
4496 @node Abort
4497 @section @code{.abort}
4498
4499 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4500 @cindex stopping the assembly
4501 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4502 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4503 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4504 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4505 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4506
4507 @ifset COFF
4508 @node ABORT (COFF)
4509 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4510
4511 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4512 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4513 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4514
4515 @ifset BOUT
4516 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4517 but ignores it.
4518 @end ifset
4519 @end ifset
4520
4521 @node Align
4522 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4523
4524 @cindex padding the location counter
4525 @cindex @code{align} directive
4526 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4527 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4528 required, as described below.
4529
4530 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4531 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4532 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4533 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4534 with no-op instructions.
4535
4536 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4537 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4538 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4539 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4540 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4541 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4542 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4543
4544 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4545 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4546 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4547 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4548 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4549 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4550 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4551
4552 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4553 strongarm, it is the
4554 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4555 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4556 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4557 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4558
4559 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4560 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4561 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4562 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4563 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4564
4565 @node Altmacro
4566 @section @code{.altmacro}
4567 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4568
4569 @ftable @code
4570 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4571 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4572 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4573 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4574 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4575 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4576 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4577
4578 @item String delimiters
4579 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4580 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4581
4582 @table @code
4583 @item '@var{string}'
4584 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4585
4586 @item <@var{string}>
4587 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4588 @end table
4589
4590 @item single-character string escape
4591 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4592 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4593 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4594 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4595
4596 @item Expression results as strings
4597 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4598 and use the result as a string.
4599 @end ftable
4600
4601 @node Ascii
4602 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4603
4604 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4605 @cindex string literals
4606 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4607 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4608 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4609
4610 @node Asciz
4611 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4612
4613 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4614 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4615 @cindex null-terminated strings
4616 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4617 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4618
4619 @node Balign
4620 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4621
4622 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4623 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4624 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4625 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4626 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4627 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4628 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4629
4630 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4631 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4632 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4633 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4634 with no-op instructions.
4635
4636 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4637 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4638 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4639 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4640 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4641 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4642 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4643
4644 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4645 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4646 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4647 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4648 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4649 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4650 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4651 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4652 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4653 undefined.
4654
4655 @node Bundle directives
4656 @section Bundle directives
4657 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4658 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4659 @cindex bundle
4660 @cindex instruction bundle
4661 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4662 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4663 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4664 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4665 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4666 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4667 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4668
4669 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4670 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4671 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4672 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4673 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4674 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4675 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4676 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4677 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4678 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4679 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4680
4681 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4682 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4683 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4684 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4685 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4686 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4687 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4688 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4689 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4690
4691 @cindex bundle-locked
4692 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4693 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4694 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4695 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4696 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4697 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4698 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4699 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4700 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4701 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4702 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4703 bundle size.
4704
4705 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4706 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4707 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4708 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4709 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4710 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4711
4712 @node Byte
4713 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4714
4715 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4716 @cindex integers, one byte
4717 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4718 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4719
4720 @node CFI directives
4721 @section CFI directives
4722 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4723 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4724 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4725 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4726 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4727 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4728 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4729 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4730
4731 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4732 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4733
4734 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4735 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4736
4737 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4738 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4739 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4740 redefine it will result in an error.
4741
4742 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4743 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4744 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4745 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4746 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4747 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4748
4749 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4750 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4751
4752 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4753 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4754 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4755 unwind entry previously opened by
4756 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4757
4758 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4759 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4760 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4761 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4762 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4763 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4764 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4765 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4766 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4767 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4768 no personality routine.
4769
4770 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4771 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4772 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4773 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4774 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4775 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4776
4777 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4778 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4779 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4780 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4781 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4782 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4783 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4784 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4785
4786 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4787 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4788 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4789 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4790 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4791 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4792 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4793
4794 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4795 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4796 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4797 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4798 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4799 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4800
4801 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4802 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4803 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4804 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4805 by a section directive.
4806
4807 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4808 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4809 @code{.p2align} directive.
4810
4811 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4812 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4813 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4814
4815 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4816 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4817 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4818 remains the same.
4819
4820 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4821 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4822 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4823 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4824 CFA address.
4825
4826 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4827 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4828 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4829
4830 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4831 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4832 CFA.
4833
4834 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4835 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4836
4837 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4838 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4839 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4840 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4841 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4842 code it's annotating.
4843
4844 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4845 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4846
4847 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4848 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4849 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4850 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4851
4852 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4853 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4854
4855 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4856 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4857 i.e. no restoration needed.
4858
4859 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4860 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4861 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4862 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4863 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4864 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4865 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4866
4867 @smallexample
4868 je label
4869 popq %rbx
4870 .cfi_restore %rbx
4871 popq %r12
4872 .cfi_restore %r12
4873 popq %rbp
4874 .cfi_restore %rbp
4875 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4876 ret
4877 label:
4878 /* Do something else */
4879 @end smallexample
4880
4881 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4882 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4883 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4884 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4885 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4886 we can write:
4887
4888 @smallexample
4889 je label
4890 popq %rbx
4891 .cfi_remember_state
4892 .cfi_restore %rbx
4893 popq %r12
4894 .cfi_restore %r12
4895 popq %rbp
4896 .cfi_restore %rbp
4897 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4898 ret
4899 label:
4900 .cfi_restore_state
4901 /* Do something else */
4902 @end smallexample
4903
4904 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4905 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4906 @code{.cfi} directives.
4907
4908 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4909 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4910 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4911
4912 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4913 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4914
4915 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4916 SPARC register window has been saved.
4917
4918 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4919 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4920 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4921 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4922
4923 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4924 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4925 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4926 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4927
4928 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4929 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4930 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4931 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4932 or another register.
4933
4934 @node Comm
4935 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4936
4937 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4938 @cindex symbol, common
4939 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4940 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4941 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4942 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4943 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4944 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4945 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4946 using the largest size.
4947
4948 @ifset COFF-ELF
4949 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4950 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4951 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4952 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4953 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4954 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4955 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4956 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4957 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4958 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4959 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4960 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4961 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4962 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4963 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4964 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4965 @end ifset
4966
4967 @ifset HPPA
4968 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4969 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4970 @end ifset
4971
4972 @node Data
4973 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4974
4975 @cindex @code{data} directive
4976 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4977 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4978 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4979 to zero.
4980
4981 @ifset COFF
4982 @node Def
4983 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4984
4985 @cindex @code{def} directive
4986 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4987 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4988 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4989 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4990 @ifset BOUT
4991
4992 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4993 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4994 but ignored.
4995 @end ifset
4996 @end ifset
4997
4998 @ifset aout-bout
4999 @node Desc
5000 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5001
5002 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5003 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5004 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5005 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5006 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5007
5008 @ifset COFF
5009 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5010 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5011 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5012 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5013 @end ifset
5014 @end ifset
5015
5016 @ifset COFF
5017 @node Dim
5018 @section @code{.dim}
5019
5020 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5021 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5022 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5023 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5024 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5025 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5026 @ifset BOUT
5027
5028 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5029 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5030 ignores it.
5031 @end ifset
5032 @end ifset
5033
5034 @node Double
5035 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5036
5037 @cindex @code{double} directive
5038 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5039 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5040 assembles floating point numbers.
5041 @ifset GENERIC
5042 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5043 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5044 @end ifset
5045 @ifclear GENERIC
5046 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5047 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5048 in @sc{ieee} format.
5049 @end ifset
5050 @end ifclear
5051
5052 @node Eject
5053 @section @code{.eject}
5054
5055 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5056 @cindex new page, in listings
5057 @cindex page, in listings
5058 @cindex listing control: new page
5059 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5060
5061 @node Else
5062 @section @code{.else}
5063
5064 @cindex @code{else} directive
5065 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5066 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5067 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5068 was false.
5069
5070 @node Elseif
5071 @section @code{.elseif}
5072
5073 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5074 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5075 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5076 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5077
5078 @node End
5079 @section @code{.end}
5080
5081 @cindex @code{end} directive
5082 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5083 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5084
5085 @ifset COFF
5086 @node Endef
5087 @section @code{.endef}
5088
5089 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5090 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5091 @code{.def}.
5092 @ifset BOUT
5093
5094 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5095 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5096 directive but ignores it.
5097 @end ifset
5098 @end ifset
5099
5100 @node Endfunc
5101 @section @code{.endfunc}
5102 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5103 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5104
5105 @node Endif
5106 @section @code{.endif}
5107
5108 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5109 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5110 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5111 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5112
5113 @node Equ
5114 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5115
5116 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5117 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5118 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5119 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5120 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5121
5122 @ifset HPPA
5123 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5124 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5125 @end ifset
5126
5127 @ifset Z80
5128 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5129 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5130 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5131 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5132 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5133 @end ifset
5134
5135 @node Equiv
5136 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5137 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5138 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5139 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5140 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5141 undefined.
5142
5143 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5144 @smallexample
5145 .ifdef SYM
5146 .err
5147 .endif
5148 .equ SYM,VAL
5149 @end smallexample
5150 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5151
5152 @node Eqv
5153 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5154 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5155 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5156 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5157 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5158 value is taken.
5159
5160 @node Err
5161 @section @code{.err}
5162 @cindex @code{err} directive
5163 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5164 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5165 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5166
5167 @node Error
5168 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5169 @cindex error directive
5170
5171 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5172 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5173 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5174 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5175
5176 @smallexample
5177 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5178 @end smallexample
5179
5180 @node Exitm
5181 @section @code{.exitm}
5182 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5183
5184 @node Extern
5185 @section @code{.extern}
5186
5187 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5188 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5189 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5190 all undefined symbols as external.
5191
5192 @node Fail
5193 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5194
5195 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5196 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5197 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5198 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5199 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5200 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5201
5202 @node File
5203 @section @code{.file}
5204 @cindex @code{file} directive
5205
5206 @ifclear no-file-dir
5207 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5208 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5209 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5210
5211 @subheading Default Version
5212
5213 @cindex logical file name
5214 @cindex file name, logical
5215 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5216 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5217
5218 @smallexample
5219 .file @var{string}
5220 @end smallexample
5221
5222 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5223 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5224 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5225 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5226 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5227
5228 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5229 @end ifclear
5230
5231 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5232 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5233
5234 @smallexample
5235 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5236 @end smallexample
5237
5238 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5239 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5240 literal.
5241
5242 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5243 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5244 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5245 entries will have.
5246
5247 @node Fill
5248 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5249
5250 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5251 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5252 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5253 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5254 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5255 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5256 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5257 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5258 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5259 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5260 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5261 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5262 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5263 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5264
5265 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5266 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5267 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5268 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5269
5270 @node Float
5271 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5272
5273 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5274 @cindex @code{float} directive
5275 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5276 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5277 @ifset GENERIC
5278 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5279 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5280 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5281 @end ifset
5282 @ifclear GENERIC
5283 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5284 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5285 in @sc{ieee} format.
5286 @end ifset
5287 @end ifclear
5288
5289 @node Func
5290 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5291 @cindex @code{func} directive
5292 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5293 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5294 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5295 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5296 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5297 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5298 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5299 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5300
5301 @node Global
5302 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5303
5304 @cindex @code{global} directive
5305 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5306 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5307 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5308 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5309 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5310 from another file linked into the same program.
5311
5312 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5313 compatibility with other assemblers.
5314
5315 @ifset HPPA
5316 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5317 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5318 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5319 @end ifset
5320
5321 @ifset ELF
5322 @node Gnu_attribute
5323 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5324 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5325
5326 @node Hidden
5327 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5328
5329 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5330 @cindex visibility
5331 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5332 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5333 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5334
5335 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5336 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5337 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5338 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5339 @end ifset
5340
5341 @node hword
5342 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5343
5344 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5345 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5346 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5347 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5348 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5349 a 16 bit number for each.
5350
5351 @ifset GENERIC
5352 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5353 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5354 @end ifset
5355 @ifclear GENERIC
5356 @ifset W32
5357 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5358 @end ifset
5359 @ifset W16
5360 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5361 @end ifset
5362 @end ifclear
5363
5364 @node Ident
5365 @section @code{.ident}
5366
5367 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5368
5369 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5370 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5371 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5372 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5373 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5374 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5375 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5376
5377 @node If
5378 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5379
5380 @cindex conditional assembly
5381 @cindex @code{if} directive
5382 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5383 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5384 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5385 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5386 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5387 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5388 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5389 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5390
5391 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5392 @table @code
5393 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5394 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5395 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5396 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5397 is considered to be undefined.
5398
5399 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5400 @item .ifb @var{text}
5401 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5402
5403 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5404 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5405 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5406 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5407 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5408 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5409 string comparison is case sensitive.
5410
5411 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5412 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5413 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5414
5415 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5416 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5417 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5418
5419 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5420 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5421 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5422 equal to zero.
5423
5424 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5425 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5426 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5427
5428 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5429 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5430 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5431 to zero.
5432
5433 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5434 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5435 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5436
5437 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5438 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5439 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5440 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5441
5442 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5443 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5444 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5445 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5446
5447 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5448 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5449 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5450 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5451 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5452 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5453 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5454
5455 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5456 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5457 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5458 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5459
5460 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5461 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5462 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5463 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5464 @end table
5465
5466 @node Incbin
5467 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5468
5469 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5470 @cindex binary files, including
5471 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5472 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5473 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5474 around @var{file}.
5475
5476 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5477 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5478 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5479 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5480 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5481
5482 @node Include
5483 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5484
5485 @cindex @code{include} directive
5486 @cindex supporting files, including
5487 @cindex files, including
5488 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5489 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5490 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5491 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5492 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5493 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5494 around @var{file}.
5495
5496 @node Int
5497 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5498
5499 @cindex @code{int} directive
5500 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5501 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5502 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5503 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5504 of target the assembly is for.
5505
5506 @ifclear GENERIC
5507 @ifset H8
5508 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5509 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5510 32-bit integers.
5511 @end ifset
5512 @end ifclear
5513
5514 @ifset ELF
5515 @node Internal
5516 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5517
5518 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5519 @cindex visibility
5520 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5521 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5522 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5523
5524 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5525 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5526 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5527 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5528 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5529 @end ifset
5530
5531 @node Irp
5532 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5533
5534 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5535 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5536 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5537 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5538 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5539 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5540 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5541 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5542
5543 For example, assembling
5544
5545 @example
5546 .irp param,1,2,3
5547 move d\param,sp@@-
5548 .endr
5549 @end example
5550
5551 is equivalent to assembling
5552
5553 @example
5554 move d1,sp@@-
5555 move d2,sp@@-
5556 move d3,sp@@-
5557 @end example
5558
5559 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5560
5561 @node Irpc
5562 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5563
5564 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5565 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5566 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5567 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5568 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5569 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5570 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5571 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5572
5573 For example, assembling
5574
5575 @example
5576 .irpc param,123
5577 move d\param,sp@@-
5578 .endr
5579 @end example
5580
5581 is equivalent to assembling
5582
5583 @example
5584 move d1,sp@@-
5585 move d2,sp@@-
5586 move d3,sp@@-
5587 @end example
5588
5589 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5590 at @xref{Macro}.
5591
5592 @node Lcomm
5593 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5594
5595 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5596 @cindex local common symbols
5597 @cindex symbols, local common
5598 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5599 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5600 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5601 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5602 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5603 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5604
5605 @ifset GENERIC
5606 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5607 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5608 @end ifset
5609
5610 @ifset HPPA
5611 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5612 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5613 @end ifset
5614
5615 @node Lflags
5616 @section @code{.lflags}
5617
5618 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5619 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5620 assemblers, but ignores it.
5621
5622 @ifclear no-line-dir
5623 @node Line
5624 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5625
5626 @cindex @code{line} directive
5627 @cindex logical line number
5628 @ifset aout-bout
5629 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5630 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5631 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5632 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5633 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5634 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5635 @end ifset
5636
5637 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5638 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5639 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5640 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5641 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5642
5643 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5644 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5645 debugging.
5646 @end ifclear
5647
5648 @node Linkonce
5649 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5650 @cindex COMDAT
5651 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5652 @cindex common sections
5653 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5654 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5655 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5656 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5657 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5658 unique.
5659
5660 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5661 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5662 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5663
5664 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5665 following strings. For example:
5666 @smallexample
5667 .linkonce same_size
5668 @end smallexample
5669 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5670
5671 @table @code
5672 @item discard
5673 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5674
5675 @item one_only
5676 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5677
5678 @item same_size
5679 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5680
5681 @item same_contents
5682 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5683 @end table
5684
5685 @node List
5686 @section @code{.list}
5687
5688 @cindex @code{list} directive
5689 @cindex listing control, turning on
5690 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5691 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5692 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5693 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5694 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5695
5696 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5697 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5698 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5699
5700 @node Ln
5701 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5702
5703 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5704 @ifclear no-line-dir
5705 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5706 @end ifclear
5707 @ifset no-line-dir
5708 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5709 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5710 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5711 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5712 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5713 @ifset BOUT
5714
5715 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5716 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5717 output format.
5718 @end ifset
5719 @end ifset
5720
5721 @node Loc
5722 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5723 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5724 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5725 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5726 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5727 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5728 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5729 the row is added.
5730
5731 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5732
5733 @table @code
5734 @item basic_block
5735 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5736 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5737
5738 @item prologue_end
5739 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5740 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5741
5742 @item epilogue_begin
5743 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5744 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5745
5746 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5747 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5748 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5749 either 0 or 1.
5750
5751 @item isa @var{value}
5752 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5753 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5754
5755 @item discriminator @var{value}
5756 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5757 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5758
5759 @end table
5760
5761 @node Loc_mark_labels
5762 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5763 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5764 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5765 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5766 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5767 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5768 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5769 this function respectively.
5770
5771 @ifset ELF
5772 @node Local
5773 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5774
5775 @cindex @code{local} directive
5776 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5777 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5778 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5779 they will be created.
5780
5781 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5782 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5783 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5784 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5785 @end ifset
5786
5787 @node Long
5788 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5789
5790 @cindex @code{long} directive
5791 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5792
5793 @ignore
5794 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5795 @c what it really ought to do
5796 @node Lsym
5797 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5798
5799 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5800 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5801 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5802 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5803 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5804 the same as the expression value:
5805 @smallexample
5806 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5807 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5808 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5809 @end smallexample
5810 @noindent
5811 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5812 @end ignore
5813
5814 @node Macro
5815 @section @code{.macro}
5816
5817 @cindex macros
5818 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5819 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5820 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5821
5822 @example
5823 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5824 .long \from
5825 .if \to-\from
5826 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5827 .endif
5828 .endm
5829 @end example
5830
5831 @noindent
5832 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5833
5834 @example
5835 .long 0
5836 .long 1
5837 .long 2
5838 .long 3
5839 .long 4
5840 .long 5
5841 @end example
5842
5843 @ftable @code
5844 @item .macro @var{macname}
5845 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5846 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5847 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5848 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5849 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5850 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5851 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5852 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5853 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5854 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5855 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5856 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5857
5858 @table @code
5859 @item .macro comm
5860 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5861 arguments.
5862
5863 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5864 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5865 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5866 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5867 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5868
5869 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5870 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5871 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5872 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5873 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5874 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5875 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5876 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5877
5878 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5879 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5880 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5881 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5882 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5883
5884 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5885 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5886 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5887
5888 @end table
5889
5890 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5891 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5892 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5893 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5894 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5895 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5896 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5897 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5898 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5899 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5900 this macro definition:
5901
5902 @example
5903 .macro label l
5904 \l:
5905 .endm
5906 @end example
5907
5908 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5909 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5910 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5911 identifier.
5912
5913 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5914 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5915 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5916 length specifier like this:
5917
5918 @example
5919 .macro opcode base length
5920 \base.\length
5921 .endm
5922 @end example
5923
5924 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5925 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5926 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5927
5928 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5929
5930 @table @code
5931 @item Insert white space
5932 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5933 solution. eg:
5934
5935 @example
5936 .macro label l
5937 \l :
5938 .endm
5939 @end example
5940
5941 @item Use @samp{\()}
5942 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5943 the following text. eg:
5944
5945 @example
5946 .macro opcode base length
5947 \base\().\length
5948 .endm
5949 @end example
5950
5951 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5952 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5953 used as a separator. eg:
5954
5955 @example
5956 .altmacro
5957 .macro label l
5958 l&:
5959 .endm
5960 @end example
5961 @end table
5962
5963 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5964 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5965 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5966
5967 @item .endm
5968 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5969 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5970
5971 @item .exitm
5972 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5973 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5974
5975 @cindex number of macros executed
5976 @cindex macros, count executed
5977 @item \@@
5978 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5979 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5980 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5981
5982 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5983 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5984 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5985 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5986 @end ftable
5987
5988 @node MRI
5989 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5990
5991 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5992 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5993 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5994 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5995 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5996 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5997
5998 @node Noaltmacro
5999 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6000 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6001
6002 @node Nolist
6003 @section @code{.nolist}
6004
6005 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6006 @cindex listing control, turning off
6007 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6008 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6009 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6010 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6011 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6012
6013 @node Octa
6014 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6015
6016 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6017 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6018 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6019 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6020 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6021 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6022
6023 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6024 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6025
6026 @node Offset
6027 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6028
6029 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6030 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6031 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6032 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6033 directive.
6034
6035 @node Org
6036 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6037
6038 @cindex @code{org} directive
6039 @cindex location counter, advancing
6040 @cindex advancing location counter
6041 @cindex current address, advancing
6042 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6043 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6044 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6045 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6046 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6047 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6048 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6049 is the same as the current subsection.
6050
6051 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6052 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6053 backwards.
6054
6055 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6056 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6057 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6058 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6059 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6060 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6061
6062 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6063 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6064 people's assemblers.
6065
6066 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6067 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6068 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6069 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6070
6071 @node P2align
6072 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6073
6074 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6075 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6076 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6077 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6078 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6079 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6080 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6081 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6082
6083 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6084 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6085 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6086 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6087 with no-op instructions.
6088
6089 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6090 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6091 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6092 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6093 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6094 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6095 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6096
6097 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6098 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6099 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6100 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6101 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6102 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6103 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6104 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6105 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6106 undefined.
6107
6108 @ifset ELF
6109 @node PopSection
6110 @section @code{.popsection}
6111
6112 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6113 @cindex Section Stack
6114 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6115 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6116 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6117 (@pxref{Previous}).
6118
6119 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6120 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6121 stack.
6122 @end ifset
6123
6124 @ifset ELF
6125 @node Previous
6126 @section @code{.previous}
6127
6128 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6129 @cindex Section Stack
6130 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6131 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6132 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6133 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6134
6135 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6136 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6137 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6138 subsections). For example:
6139
6140 @smallexample
6141 .section A
6142 .subsection 1
6143 .word 0x1234
6144 .subsection 2
6145 .word 0x5678
6146 .previous
6147 .word 0x9abc
6148 @end smallexample
6149
6150 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6151 section A. Whilst:
6152
6153 @smallexample
6154 .section A
6155 .subsection 1
6156 # Now in section A subsection 1
6157 .word 0x1234
6158 .section B
6159 .subsection 0
6160 # Now in section B subsection 0
6161 .word 0x5678
6162 .subsection 1
6163 # Now in section B subsection 1
6164 .word 0x9abc
6165 .previous
6166 # Now in section B subsection 0
6167 .word 0xdef0
6168 @end smallexample
6169
6170 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6171 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6172
6173 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6174 the top section on the section stack.
6175 @end ifset
6176
6177 @node Print
6178 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6179
6180 @cindex @code{print} directive
6181 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6182 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6183
6184 @ifset ELF
6185 @node Protected
6186 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6187
6188 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6189 @cindex visibility
6190 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6191 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6192
6193 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6194 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6195 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6196 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6197 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6198 this.
6199 @end ifset
6200
6201 @node Psize
6202 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6203
6204 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6205 @cindex listing control: paper size
6206 @cindex paper size, for listings
6207 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6208 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6209
6210 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6211 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6212 default width is 200 columns.
6213
6214 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6215 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6216 @code{.eject}).
6217
6218 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6219 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6220
6221 @node Purgem
6222 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6223
6224 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6225 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6226 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6227
6228 @ifset ELF
6229 @node PushSection
6230 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6231
6232 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6233 @cindex Section Stack
6234 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6235 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6236 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6237 (@pxref{Previous}).
6238
6239 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6240 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6241 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6242 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6243 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6244 @end ifset
6245
6246 @node Quad
6247 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6248
6249 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6250 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6251 each bignum, it emits
6252 @ifclear bignum-16
6253 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6254 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6255 @cindex eight-byte integer
6256 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6257
6258 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6259 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6260 @end ifclear
6261 @ifset bignum-16
6262 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6263 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6264 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6265 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6266 @end ifset
6267
6268 @node Reloc
6269 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6270
6271 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6272 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6273 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6274 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6275 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6276 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6277 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6278 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6279 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6280 section.
6281
6282 @node Rept
6283 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6284
6285 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6286 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6287 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6288
6289 For example, assembling
6290
6291 @example
6292 .rept 3
6293 .long 0
6294 .endr
6295 @end example
6296
6297 is equivalent to assembling
6298
6299 @example
6300 .long 0
6301 .long 0
6302 .long 0
6303 @end example
6304
6305 @node Sbttl
6306 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6307
6308 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6309 @cindex subtitles for listings
6310 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6311 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6312 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6313
6314 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6315 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6316
6317 @ifset COFF
6318 @node Scl
6319 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6320
6321 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6322 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6323 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6324 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6325 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6326 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6327 symbolic debugging information.
6328 @ifset BOUT
6329
6330 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6331 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6332 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6333 @end ifset
6334 @end ifset
6335
6336 @ifset COFF-ELF
6337 @node Section
6338 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6339
6340 @cindex named section
6341 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6342 named @var{name}.
6343
6344 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6345 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6346 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6347
6348 @ifset COFF
6349 @ifset ELF
6350 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6351 @subheading COFF Version
6352 @end ifset
6353
6354 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6355 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6356 ways:
6357
6358 @smallexample
6359 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6360 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6361 @end smallexample
6362
6363 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6364 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6365
6366 @table @code
6367 @item b
6368 bss section (uninitialized data)
6369 @item n
6370 section is not loaded
6371 @item w
6372 writable section
6373 @item d
6374 data section
6375 @item e
6376 exclude section from linking
6377 @item r
6378 read-only section
6379 @item x
6380 executable section
6381 @item s
6382 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6383 @item a
6384 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6385 @item y
6386 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6387 @item 0-9
6388 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6389 @end table
6390
6391 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6392 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6393 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6394 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6395 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6396
6397 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6398 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6399 @end ifset
6400
6401 @ifset ELF
6402 @ifset COFF
6403 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6404 @subheading ELF Version
6405 @end ifset
6406
6407 @cindex Section Stack
6408 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6409 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6410 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6411 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6412
6413 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6414 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6415
6416 @smallexample
6417 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6418 @end smallexample
6419
6420 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6421 @kindex --sectname-subst
6422 @cindex section name substitution
6423 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6424 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6425 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6426
6427 @smallexample
6428 .macro exception_code
6429 .section %S.exception
6430 [exception code here]
6431 .previous
6432 .endm
6433
6434 .text
6435 [code]
6436 exception_code
6437 [...]
6438
6439 .section .init
6440 [init code]
6441 exception_code
6442 [...]
6443 @end smallexample
6444
6445 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6446 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6447 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6448 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6449 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6450 macros just for that purpose.
6451
6452 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6453 combination of the following characters:
6454
6455 @table @code
6456 @item a
6457 section is allocatable
6458 @item e
6459 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6460 @item w
6461 section is writable
6462 @item x
6463 section is executable
6464 @item M
6465 section is mergeable
6466 @item S
6467 section contains zero terminated strings
6468 @item G
6469 section is a member of a section group
6470 @item T
6471 section is used for thread-local-storage
6472 @item ?
6473 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6474 @item @code{<number>}
6475 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6476 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6477 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6478 resulting value.
6479 @item @code{<target specific>}
6480 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6481 @end table
6482
6483 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6484 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6485 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6486 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6487 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6488 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6489
6490 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6491
6492 @table @code
6493 @item @@progbits
6494 section contains data
6495 @item @@nobits
6496 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6497 @item @@note
6498 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6499 @item @@init_array
6500 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6501 @item @@fini_array
6502 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6503 @item @@preinit_array
6504 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6505 @item @@@code{<number>}
6506 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6507 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6508 some targets extend this list with their own types
6509 @end table
6510
6511 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6512 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6513
6514 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6515 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6516 @code{%} character.
6517
6518 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6519 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6520 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6521
6522 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6523 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6524
6525 @smallexample
6526 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6527 @end smallexample
6528
6529 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6530 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6531 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6532 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6533 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6534 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6535 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6536 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6537 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6538
6539 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6540 be present along with an additional field like this:
6541
6542 @smallexample
6543 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6544 @end smallexample
6545
6546 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6547 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6548
6549 @table @code
6550 @item comdat
6551 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6552 @item .gnu.linkonce
6553 an alias for comdat
6554 @end table
6555
6556 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6557 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6558
6559 @smallexample
6560 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6561 @end smallexample
6562
6563 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6564 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6565 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6566 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6567 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6568 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6569
6570 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6571 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6572 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6573 executable. The section will contain data.
6574
6575 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6576 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6577
6578 @smallexample
6579 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6580 @end smallexample
6581
6582 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6583 separated flags:
6584
6585 @table @code
6586 @item #alloc
6587 section is allocatable
6588 @item #write
6589 section is writable
6590 @item #execinstr
6591 section is executable
6592 @item #exclude
6593 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6594 @item #tls
6595 section is used for thread local storage
6596 @end table
6597
6598 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6599 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6600 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6601 work.
6602 @end ifset
6603 @end ifset
6604
6605 @node Set
6606 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6607
6608 @cindex @code{set} directive
6609 @cindex symbol value, setting
6610 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6611 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6612 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6613 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6614
6615 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6616 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6617 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6618 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6619 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6620 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6621 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6622 different symbols.
6623
6624 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6625 file is the last value stored into it.
6626
6627 @ifset Z80
6628 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6629 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6630 @end ifset
6631
6632 @node Short
6633 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6634
6635 @cindex @code{short} directive
6636 @ifset GENERIC
6637 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6638 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6639
6640 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6641 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6642 @end ifset
6643 @ifclear GENERIC
6644 @ifset W16
6645 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6646 @end ifset
6647 @ifset W32
6648 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6649 a 16 bit number for each.
6650 @end ifset
6651 @end ifclear
6652
6653 @node Single
6654 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6655
6656 @cindex @code{single} directive
6657 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6658 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6659 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6660 @ifset GENERIC
6661 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6662 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6663 @end ifset
6664 @ifclear GENERIC
6665 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6666 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6667 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6668 @end ifset
6669 @end ifclear
6670
6671 @ifset COFF-ELF
6672 @node Size
6673 @section @code{.size}
6674
6675 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6676
6677 @ifset COFF
6678 @ifset ELF
6679 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6680 @subheading COFF Version
6681 @end ifset
6682
6683 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6684 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6685 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6686
6687 @smallexample
6688 .size @var{expression}
6689 @end smallexample
6690
6691 @ifset BOUT
6692 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6693 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6694 ignores it.
6695 @end ifset
6696 @end ifset
6697
6698 @ifset ELF
6699 @ifset COFF
6700 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6701 @subheading ELF Version
6702 @end ifset
6703
6704 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6705 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6706
6707 @smallexample
6708 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6709 @end smallexample
6710
6711 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6712 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6713 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6714 symbols.
6715 @end ifset
6716 @end ifset
6717
6718 @ifclear no-space-dir
6719 @node Skip
6720 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6721
6722 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6723 @cindex filling memory
6724 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6725 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6726 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6727 @samp{.space}.
6728 @end ifclear
6729
6730 @node Sleb128
6731 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6732
6733 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6734 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6735 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6736 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6737
6738 @ifclear no-space-dir
6739 @node Space
6740 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6741
6742 @cindex @code{space} directive
6743 @cindex filling memory
6744 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6745 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6746 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6747 as @samp{.skip}.
6748
6749 @ifset HPPA
6750 @quotation
6751 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6752 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6753 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6754 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6755 for a summary.
6756 @end quotation
6757 @end ifset
6758 @end ifclear
6759
6760 @ifset have-stabs
6761 @node Stab
6762 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6763
6764 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6765 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6766 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6767 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6768 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6769 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6770 Up to five fields are required:
6771
6772 @table @var
6773 @item string
6774 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6775 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6776 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6777 using this field.
6778
6779 @item type
6780 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6781 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6782 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6783
6784 @item other
6785 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6786 low 8 bits of this expression.
6787
6788 @item desc
6789 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6790 bits of this expression.
6791
6792 @item value
6793 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6794 @end table
6795
6796 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6797 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6798 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6799 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6800
6801 @table @code
6802 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6803 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6804
6805 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6806 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6807 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6808 strings.
6809
6810 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6811 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6812 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6813 assembled.
6814
6815 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6816 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6817 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6818
6819 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6820 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6821 All five fields are specified.
6822 @end table
6823 @end ifset
6824 @c end have-stabs
6825
6826 @node String
6827 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6828 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6829
6830 @cindex string, copying to object file
6831 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6832 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6833 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6834 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6835 @cindex @code{string} directive
6836 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6837 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6838 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6839 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6840
6841 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6842 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6843 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6844 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6845
6846 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6847 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6848 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6849 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6850
6851 Example:
6852 @smallexample
6853 .string32 "BYE"
6854 expands to:
6855 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6856 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6857 @end smallexample
6858
6859
6860 @node Struct
6861 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6862
6863 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6864 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6865 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6866 @smallexample
6867 .struct 0
6868 field1:
6869 .struct field1 + 4
6870 field2:
6871 .struct field2 + 4
6872 field3:
6873 @end smallexample
6874 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6875 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6876 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6877 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6878 before further assembly.
6879
6880 @ifset ELF
6881 @node SubSection
6882 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6883
6884 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6885 @cindex Section Stack
6886 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6887 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6888 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6889 (@pxref{Previous}).
6890
6891 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6892 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6893 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6894 @end ifset
6895
6896 @ifset ELF
6897 @node Symver
6898 @section @code{.symver}
6899 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6900 @cindex symbol versioning
6901 @cindex versions of symbols
6902 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6903 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6904 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6905 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6906 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6907 shared library.
6908
6909 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6910 @smallexample
6911 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6912 @end smallexample
6913 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6914 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6915 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6916 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6917 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6918 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6919 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6920 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6921 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6922 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6923 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6924 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6925 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6926 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6927
6928 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6929 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6930 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6931 symbol table.
6932
6933 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6934 @smallexample
6935 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6936 @end smallexample
6937 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6938 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6939 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6940 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6941
6942 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6943 @smallexample
6944 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6945 @end smallexample
6946 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6947 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6948 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6949 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6950 @end ifset
6951
6952 @ifset COFF
6953 @node Tag
6954 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6955
6956 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6957 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6958 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6959 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6960 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6961 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6962 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6963 @ifset BOUT
6964
6965 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6966 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6967 ignores it.
6968 @end ifset
6969 @end ifset
6970
6971 @node Text
6972 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6973
6974 @cindex @code{text} directive
6975 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6976 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6977 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6978 is used.
6979
6980 @node Title
6981 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6982
6983 @cindex @code{title} directive
6984 @cindex listing control: title line
6985 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6986 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6987
6988 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6989 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6990
6991 @ifset COFF-ELF
6992 @node Type
6993 @section @code{.type}
6994
6995 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6996
6997 @ifset COFF
6998 @ifset ELF
6999 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7000 @subheading COFF Version
7001 @end ifset
7002
7003 @cindex COFF symbol type
7004 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7005 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7006 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7007 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7008
7009 @smallexample
7010 .type @var{int}
7011 @end smallexample
7012
7013 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7014 entry.
7015
7016 @ifset BOUT
7017 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7018 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7019 directive but ignores it.
7020 @end ifset
7021 @end ifset
7022
7023 @ifset ELF
7024 @ifset COFF
7025 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7026 @subheading ELF Version
7027 @end ifset
7028
7029 @cindex ELF symbol type
7030 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7031 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7032 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7033
7034 @smallexample
7035 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7036 @end smallexample
7037
7038 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7039 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7040 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7041 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7042
7043 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7044 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7045 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7046 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7047 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7048 assemblers.
7049
7050 The syntaxes supported are:
7051
7052 @smallexample
7053 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7054 .type <name>,#<type>
7055 .type <name>,@@<type>
7056 .type <name>,%<type>
7057 .type <name>,"<type>"
7058 @end smallexample
7059
7060 The types supported are:
7061
7062 @table @gcctabopt
7063 @item STT_FUNC
7064 @itemx function
7065 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7066
7067 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7068 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7069 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7070 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7071
7072 @item STT_OBJECT
7073 @itemx object
7074 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7075
7076 @item STT_TLS
7077 @itemx tls_object
7078 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
7079
7080 @item STT_COMMON
7081 @itemx common
7082 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7083
7084 @item STT_NOTYPE
7085 @itemx notype
7086 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7087
7088 @item gnu_unique_object
7089 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7090 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7091 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7092 systems).
7093
7094 @end table
7095
7096 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7097
7098 @end ifset
7099 @end ifset
7100
7101 @node Uleb128
7102 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7103
7104 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7105 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7106 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7107 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7108
7109 @ifset COFF
7110 @node Val
7111 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7112
7113 @cindex @code{val} directive
7114 @cindex COFF value attribute
7115 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7116 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7117 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7118 entry.
7119 @ifset BOUT
7120
7121 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7122 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7123 @end ifset
7124 @end ifset
7125
7126 @ifset ELF
7127 @node Version
7128 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7129
7130 @cindex @code{version} directive
7131 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7132 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7133 @end ifset
7134
7135 @ifset ELF
7136 @node VTableEntry
7137 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7138
7139 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7140 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7141 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7142
7143 @node VTableInherit
7144 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7145
7146 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7147 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7148 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7149 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7150 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7151 @end ifset
7152
7153 @node Warning
7154 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7155 @cindex warning directive
7156 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7157 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7158
7159 @node Weak
7160 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7161
7162 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7163 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7164 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7165
7166 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7167 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7168 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7169
7170 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7171 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7172 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7173
7174 @node Weakref
7175 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7176
7177 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7178 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7179 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7180 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7181 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7182 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7183
7184 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7185 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7186 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7187 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7188 had the references to the alias removed.
7189
7190 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7191 within the assembler.
7192
7193 @node Word
7194 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7195
7196 @cindex @code{word} directive
7197 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7198 separated by commas.
7199 @ifclear GENERIC
7200 @ifset W32
7201 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7202 @end ifset
7203 @ifset W16
7204 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7205 @end ifset
7206 @end ifclear
7207 @ifset GENERIC
7208
7209 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7210 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7211 @end ifset
7212
7213 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7214 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7215 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7216 @cindex difference tables altered
7217 @cindex altered difference tables
7218 @quotation
7219 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7220 @end quotation
7221
7222 @ifset GENERIC
7223 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7224 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7225 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7226 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7227
7228 @end ifset
7229 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7230 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7231 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7232 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7233 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7234 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7235 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7236 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7237 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7238 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7239 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7240 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7241 @code{sym2}.
7242
7243 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7244 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7245 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7246 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7247 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7248 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7249 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7250
7251 @ifset INTERNALS
7252 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7253 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7254 assembly language programmers.
7255 @end ifset
7256 @end ifset
7257 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7258
7259 @ifclear no-space-dir
7260 @node Zero
7261 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7262
7263 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7264 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7265 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7266 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7267 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7268 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7269 @end ifclear
7270
7271 @node Deprecated
7272 @section Deprecated Directives
7273
7274 @cindex deprecated directives
7275 @cindex obsolescent directives
7276 One day these directives won't work.
7277 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7278 @table @t
7279 @item .abort
7280 @item .line
7281 @end table
7282
7283 @ifset ELF
7284 @node Object Attributes
7285 @chapter Object Attributes
7286 @cindex object attributes
7287
7288 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7289 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7290 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7291 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7292 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7293 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7294 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7295 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7296 newer generation at run-time.
7297
7298 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7299 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7300 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7301 correctly.
7302
7303 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7304 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7305 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7306 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7307 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7308 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7309
7310 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7311 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7312
7313 @menu
7314 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7315 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7316 @end menu
7317
7318 @node GNU Object Attributes
7319 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7320
7321 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7322 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7323
7324 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7325 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7326 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7327 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7328 architecture-dependent ones.
7329
7330 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7331
7332 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7333
7334 @table @r
7335 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7336 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7337 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7338 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7339 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7340 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7341 @end table
7342
7343 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7344
7345 @table @r
7346 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7347 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7348
7349 @itemize @bullet
7350 @item
7351 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7352 @item
7353 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7354 double-precision FPU.
7355 @item
7356 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7357 @item
7358 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7359 @item
7360 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7361 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7362 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7363 @item
7364 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7365 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7366 general-purpose registers.
7367 @item
7368 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7369 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7370 @item
7371 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7372 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7373 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7374 @end itemize
7375 @end table
7376
7377 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7378
7379 @table @r
7380 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7381 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7382
7383 @itemize @bullet
7384 @item
7385 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7386 @item
7387 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7388 @item
7389 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7390 @item
7391 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7392 @end itemize
7393
7394 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7395 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7396
7397 @itemize @bullet
7398 @item
7399 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7400 @item
7401 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7402 @item
7403 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7404 @item
7405 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7406 @end itemize
7407 @end table
7408
7409 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7410
7411 @table @r
7412 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7413 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7414
7415 @itemize @bullet
7416 @item
7417 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7418 @item
7419 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7420 @item
7421 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7422 @end itemize
7423 @end table
7424
7425 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7426 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7427
7428 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7429 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7430 mailing list.
7431
7432 @itemize @bullet
7433 @item
7434 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7435 @item
7436 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7437 @item
7438 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7439 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7440 @item
7441 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7442 @item
7443 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7444 @item
7445 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7446 @end itemize
7447
7448 @end ifset
7449
7450 @ifset GENERIC
7451 @node Machine Dependencies
7452 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7453
7454 @cindex machine dependencies
7455 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7456 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7457 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7458 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7459 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7460 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7461 optimization.
7462
7463 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7464 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7465 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7466
7467 @menu
7468 @ifset AARCH64
7469 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7470 @end ifset
7471 @ifset ALPHA
7472 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7473 @end ifset
7474 @ifset ARC
7475 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7476 @end ifset
7477 @ifset ARM
7478 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7479 @end ifset
7480 @ifset AVR
7481 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7482 @end ifset
7483 @ifset Blackfin
7484 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7485 @end ifset
7486 @ifset CR16
7487 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7488 @end ifset
7489 @ifset CRIS
7490 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7491 @end ifset
7492 @ifset D10V
7493 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7494 @end ifset
7495 @ifset D30V
7496 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7497 @end ifset
7498 @ifset EPIPHANY
7499 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7500 @end ifset
7501 @ifset H8/300
7502 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7503 @end ifset
7504 @ifset HPPA
7505 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7506 @end ifset
7507 @ifset I370
7508 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7509 @end ifset
7510 @ifset I80386
7511 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7512 @end ifset
7513 @ifset I860
7514 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7515 @end ifset
7516 @ifset I960
7517 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7518 @end ifset
7519 @ifset IA64
7520 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7521 @end ifset
7522 @ifset IP2K
7523 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7524 @end ifset
7525 @ifset LM32
7526 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7527 @end ifset
7528 @ifset M32C
7529 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7530 @end ifset
7531 @ifset M32R
7532 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7533 @end ifset
7534 @ifset M680X0
7535 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7536 @end ifset
7537 @ifset M68HC11
7538 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7539 @end ifset
7540 @ifset METAG
7541 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7542 @end ifset
7543 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7544 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7545 @end ifset
7546 @ifset MIPS
7547 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7548 @end ifset
7549 @ifset MMIX
7550 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7551 @end ifset
7552 @ifset MSP430
7553 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7554 @end ifset
7555 @ifset NDS32
7556 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7557 @end ifset
7558 @ifset NIOSII
7559 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7560 @end ifset
7561 @ifset NS32K
7562 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7563 @end ifset
7564 @ifset PDP11
7565 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7566 @end ifset
7567 @ifset PJ
7568 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7569 @end ifset
7570 @ifset PPC
7571 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7572 @end ifset
7573 @ifset RL78
7574 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7575 @end ifset
7576 @ifset RX
7577 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7578 @end ifset
7579 @ifset S390
7580 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7581 @end ifset
7582 @ifset SCORE
7583 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7584 @end ifset
7585 @ifset SH
7586 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7587 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7588 @end ifset
7589 @ifset SPARC
7590 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7591 @end ifset
7592 @ifset TIC54X
7593 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7594 @end ifset
7595 @ifset TIC6X
7596 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7597 @end ifset
7598 @ifset TILEGX
7599 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7600 @end ifset
7601 @ifset TILEPRO
7602 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7603 @end ifset
7604 @ifset V850
7605 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7606 @end ifset
7607 @ifset VAX
7608 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7609 @end ifset
7610 @ifset VISIUM
7611 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7612 @end ifset
7613 @ifset XGATE
7614 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7615 @end ifset
7616 @ifset XSTORMY16
7617 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7618 @end ifset
7619 @ifset XTENSA
7620 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7621 @end ifset
7622 @ifset Z80
7623 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7624 @end ifset
7625 @ifset Z8000
7626 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7627 @end ifset
7628 @end menu
7629
7630 @lowersections
7631 @end ifset
7632
7633 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7634 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7635 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7636 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7637 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7638 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7639 @c in both conditional blocks.
7640
7641 @ifset AARCH64
7642 @include c-aarch64.texi
7643 @end ifset
7644
7645 @ifset ALPHA
7646 @include c-alpha.texi
7647 @end ifset
7648
7649 @ifset ARC
7650 @include c-arc.texi
7651 @end ifset
7652
7653 @ifset ARM
7654 @include c-arm.texi
7655 @end ifset
7656
7657 @ifset AVR
7658 @include c-avr.texi
7659 @end ifset
7660
7661 @ifset Blackfin
7662 @include c-bfin.texi
7663 @end ifset
7664
7665 @ifset CR16
7666 @include c-cr16.texi
7667 @end ifset
7668
7669 @ifset CRIS
7670 @include c-cris.texi
7671 @end ifset
7672
7673 @ifset Renesas-all
7674 @ifclear GENERIC
7675 @node Machine Dependencies
7676 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7677
7678 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7679 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7680 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7681 family.
7682
7683 @menu
7684 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7685 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7686 @end menu
7687 @lowersections
7688 @end ifclear
7689 @end ifset
7690
7691 @ifset D10V
7692 @include c-d10v.texi
7693 @end ifset
7694
7695 @ifset D30V
7696 @include c-d30v.texi
7697 @end ifset
7698
7699 @ifset EPIPHANY
7700 @include c-epiphany.texi
7701 @end ifset
7702
7703 @ifset H8/300
7704 @include c-h8300.texi
7705 @end ifset
7706
7707 @ifset HPPA
7708 @include c-hppa.texi
7709 @end ifset
7710
7711 @ifset I370
7712 @include c-i370.texi
7713 @end ifset
7714
7715 @ifset I80386
7716 @include c-i386.texi
7717 @end ifset
7718
7719 @ifset I860
7720 @include c-i860.texi
7721 @end ifset
7722
7723 @ifset I960
7724 @include c-i960.texi
7725 @end ifset
7726
7727 @ifset IA64
7728 @include c-ia64.texi
7729 @end ifset
7730
7731 @ifset IP2K
7732 @include c-ip2k.texi
7733 @end ifset
7734
7735 @ifset LM32
7736 @include c-lm32.texi
7737 @end ifset
7738
7739 @ifset M32C
7740 @include c-m32c.texi
7741 @end ifset
7742
7743 @ifset M32R
7744 @include c-m32r.texi
7745 @end ifset
7746
7747 @ifset M680X0
7748 @include c-m68k.texi
7749 @end ifset
7750
7751 @ifset M68HC11
7752 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7753 @end ifset
7754
7755 @ifset METAG
7756 @include c-metag.texi
7757 @end ifset
7758
7759 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7760 @include c-microblaze.texi
7761 @end ifset
7762
7763 @ifset MIPS
7764 @include c-mips.texi
7765 @end ifset
7766
7767 @ifset MMIX
7768 @include c-mmix.texi
7769 @end ifset
7770
7771 @ifset MSP430
7772 @include c-msp430.texi
7773 @end ifset
7774
7775 @ifset NDS32
7776 @include c-nds32.texi
7777 @end ifset
7778
7779 @ifset NIOSII
7780 @include c-nios2.texi
7781 @end ifset
7782
7783 @ifset NS32K
7784 @include c-ns32k.texi
7785 @end ifset
7786
7787 @ifset PDP11
7788 @include c-pdp11.texi
7789 @end ifset
7790
7791 @ifset PJ
7792 @include c-pj.texi
7793 @end ifset
7794
7795 @ifset PPC
7796 @include c-ppc.texi
7797 @end ifset
7798
7799 @ifset RL78
7800 @include c-rl78.texi
7801 @end ifset
7802
7803 @ifset RX
7804 @include c-rx.texi
7805 @end ifset
7806
7807 @ifset S390
7808 @include c-s390.texi
7809 @end ifset
7810
7811 @ifset SCORE
7812 @include c-score.texi
7813 @end ifset
7814
7815 @ifset SH
7816 @include c-sh.texi
7817 @include c-sh64.texi
7818 @end ifset
7819
7820 @ifset SPARC
7821 @include c-sparc.texi
7822 @end ifset
7823
7824 @ifset TIC54X
7825 @include c-tic54x.texi
7826 @end ifset
7827
7828 @ifset TIC6X
7829 @include c-tic6x.texi
7830 @end ifset
7831
7832 @ifset TILEGX
7833 @include c-tilegx.texi
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset TILEPRO
7837 @include c-tilepro.texi
7838 @end ifset
7839
7840 @ifset V850
7841 @include c-v850.texi
7842 @end ifset
7843
7844 @ifset VAX
7845 @include c-vax.texi
7846 @end ifset
7847
7848 @ifset VISIUM
7849 @include c-visium.texi
7850 @end ifset
7851
7852 @ifset XGATE
7853 @include c-xgate.texi
7854 @end ifset
7855
7856 @ifset XSTORMY16
7857 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7858 @end ifset
7859
7860 @ifset XTENSA
7861 @include c-xtensa.texi
7862 @end ifset
7863
7864 @ifset Z80
7865 @include c-z80.texi
7866 @end ifset
7867
7868 @ifset Z8000
7869 @include c-z8k.texi
7870 @end ifset
7871
7872 @ifset GENERIC
7873 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7874 @raisesections
7875 @end ifset
7876
7877 @node Reporting Bugs
7878 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7879 @cindex bugs in assembler
7880 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7881
7882 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7883
7884 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7885 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7886 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7887 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7888
7889 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7890 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7891
7892 @menu
7893 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7894 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7895 @end menu
7896
7897 @node Bug Criteria
7898 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7899 @cindex bug criteria
7900
7901 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7902
7903 @itemize @bullet
7904 @cindex fatal signal
7905 @cindex assembler crash
7906 @cindex crash of assembler
7907 @item
7908 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7909 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7910
7911 @cindex error on valid input
7912 @item
7913 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7914
7915 @cindex invalid input
7916 @item
7917 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7918 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7919 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7920
7921 @item
7922 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7923 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7924 @end itemize
7925
7926 @node Bug Reporting
7927 @section How to Report Bugs
7928 @cindex bug reports
7929 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7930
7931 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7932 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7933 contact that organization first.
7934
7935 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7936 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7937 distribution.
7938
7939 @ifset BUGURL
7940 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7941 to @value{BUGURL}.
7942 @end ifset
7943
7944 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7945 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7946 fact or leave it out, state it!
7947
7948 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7949 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7950 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7951 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7952 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7953 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7954 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7955 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7956 and the most helpful.
7957
7958 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7959 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7960 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7961
7962 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7963 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7964 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7965 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7966
7967 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7968
7969 @itemize @bullet
7970 @item
7971 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7972 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7973
7974 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7975 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7976
7977 @item
7978 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7979
7980 @item
7981 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7982 version number.
7983
7984 @item
7985 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7986 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7987
7988 @item
7989 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7990 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7991 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7992
7993 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7994 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7995
7996 @item
7997 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7998 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7999 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8000 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8001 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8002 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8003 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8004
8005 @item
8006 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8007 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8008
8009 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8010 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8011 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8012 make a mistake.
8013
8014 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8015 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8016 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8017 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8018 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8019 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8020 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8021 observations.
8022
8023 @item
8024 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8025 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8026 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8027 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8028 by line number.
8029
8030 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8031 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8032 @end itemize
8033
8034 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8035
8036 @itemize @bullet
8037 @item
8038 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8039
8040 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8041 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8042 changes will not affect it.
8043
8044 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8045 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8046 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8047 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8048
8049 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8050 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8051 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8052 less time, and so on.
8053
8054 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8055 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8056
8057 @item
8058 A patch for the bug.
8059
8060 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8061 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8062 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8063 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8064
8065 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8066 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8067 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8068 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8069
8070 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8071 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8072 help us to understand.
8073
8074 @item
8075 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8076
8077 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8078 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8079 @end itemize
8080
8081 @node Acknowledgements
8082 @chapter Acknowledgements
8083
8084 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8085 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8086 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8087 @c (October 2012),
8088 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8089
8090 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8091 more details?}
8092
8093 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8094 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8095 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8096
8097 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8098 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8099 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8100 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8101 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8102 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8103 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8104 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8105 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8106 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8107
8108 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8109 in format-specific I/O modules.
8110
8111 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8112 has done much work with it since.
8113
8114 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8115
8116 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8117
8118 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8119 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8120
8121 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8122 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8123 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8124 support a.out format.
8125
8126 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8127 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8128 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8129 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8130 targets.
8131
8132 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8133 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8134 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8135 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8136 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8137 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8138 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8139
8140 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8141 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8142 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8143 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8144
8145 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8146
8147 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8148
8149 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8150 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8151 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8152 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8153
8154 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8155 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8156 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8157 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8158 and some initial 64-bit support).
8159
8160 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8161
8162 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8163 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8164
8165 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8166 flavors.
8167
8168 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8169 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8170
8171 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8172 configuration enhancements.
8173
8174 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8175
8176 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8177 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8178 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8179 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8180
8181 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8182 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8183 @include fdl.texi
8184
8185 @node AS Index
8186 @unnumbered AS Index
8187
8188 @printindex cp
8189
8190 @bye
8191 @c Local Variables:
8192 @c fill-column: 79
8193 @c End:
This page took 0.214003 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.